Counselor Treatment Manual

Counselor’s Treatment
Manual
Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment for

People With Stimulant Use Disorders
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES

Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration
Center for Substance Abuse Treatment
1 Choke Cherry Road
Rockville, MD 20857
Acknowledgments
Numerous people contributed to this document, which is part of the Methamphetamine Treatment Project (MTP).
The document was written by Jeanne L. Obert, M.F.T., M.S.M.; Richard A. Rawson, Ph.D.; Michael J. McCann, M.A.;
and Walter Ling, M.D. The MTP Corporate Authors provided valuable guidance and support on this document.
This publication was developed with support from the University of California at Los Angeles (UCLA) Coordinating
Center through Grant No. TI11440. MTP was funded by the Center for Substance Abuse Treatment (CSAT),
Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA), U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services (DHHS). The research was conducted from 1998 to 2002 in cooperation with the following institutions:
County of San Mateo, San Mateo, CA (TI11411); East Bay Recovery Project, Hayward, CA (TI11484); Friends
Research Institute, Inc., Concord, CA (TI11425); Friends Research Institute, Inc., Costa Mesa, CA (TI11443); Saint
Francis Medical Center of Hawaii, Honolulu, HI (TI11441); San Diego Association of Governments, San Diego, CA
(TI11410); South Central Montana Regional Mental Health Center, Billings, MT (TI11427); and UCLA Coordinating
Center, Los Angeles, CA (TI11440). The publication was produced by JBS International, Inc. (JBS), under
Knowledge Application Program (KAP) contract numbers 270-99-7072 and 270-04-7049 with SAMHSA, DHHS.
Christina Currier served as the CSAT Government Project Officer. Andrea Kopstein, Ph.D., M.P.H., served as the
Deputy Government Project Officer. Cheryl Gallagher, M.A., served as CSAT content advisor. Lynne MacArthur,
M.A., A.M.L.S., served as JBS KAP Executive Project Co-Director; Barbara Fink, RN, M.P.H., served as JBS KAP
Managing Project Co-Director; and Emily Schifrin, M.S., and Dennis Burke, M.S., M.A., served as JBS KAP Deputy
Directors for Product Development. Other JBS KAP personnel included Candace Baker, M.S.W., Senior Writer;
Elliott Vanskike, Ph.D., Senior Writer; Wendy Caron, Editorial Quality Assurance Manager; Frances Nebesky, M.A.,
Quality Control Editor; Pamela Frazier, Document Production Specialist; and Claire Speights, Graphic Artist.
Disclaimer
The opinions expressed herein are the views of the authors and do not necessarily reflect the official position
of CSAT, SAMHSA, or DHHS. No official support of or endorsement by CSAT, SAMHSA, or DHHS for these
opinions or for particular instruments, software, or resources described in this document is intended or should be
inferred. The guidelines in this document should not be considered substitutes for individualized client care and
treatment decisions.
Public Domain Notice

All materials appearing in this volume except those taken directly from copyrighted sources are in the public domain
and may be reproduced or copied without permission from SAMHSA/CSAT or the authors. Do not reproduce or
distribute this publication for a fee without specific, written authorization from SAMHSA’s Office of Communications.
Electronic Access and Copies of Publication

Copies may be obtained free of charge from SAMHSA’s National Clearinghouse for Alcohol and Drug Information
(NCADI), 800-729-6686 or 301-468-2600; TDD (for hearing impaired) 800-487-4889; or electronically through
www.ncadi.samhsa.gov.
Recommended Citation
Center for Substance Abuse Treatment. Counselor’s Treatment Manual: Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment for
People With Stimulant Use Disorders. DHHS Publication No. (SMA) 06-4152. Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and
Mental Health Services Administration, 2006.
Originating Office
Practice Improvement Branch, Division of Services Improvement, Center for Substance Abuse Treatment,
Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, 1 Choke Cherry Road, Rockville, MD 20857.
DHHS Publication No. (SMA) 06-4152
Printed 2006
Contents
I. Introduction to the Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment for People
With Stimulant Use Disorders Approach and Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Matrix IOP Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Role of the Counselor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Working With Client Co-Leaders and Client–Facilitators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Matrix IOP Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Introduction to the Counselor’s Treatment Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
II. The Role of Drug and Breath-Alcohol Testing in Matrix IOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Addressing a Positive Urine Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
III. Individual/Conjoint Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Session 1: Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Session 2: Client Progress/Crisis Intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Session 3: Continuing Treatment Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Handouts for Individual/Conjoint Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IV. Early Recovery Skills Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Session 1: Stop the Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Session 2: Identifying External Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Session 3: Identifying Internal Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Session 4: Introducing 12-Step or Mutual-Help Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Session 5: Body Chemistry in Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Session 6: Common Challenges in Early Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Session 7: Thinking, Feeling, and Doing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Session 8: 12-Step Wisdom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
iii
Counselor’s Treatment Manual: Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment
Handouts for Early Recovery Skills Group Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
V. Relapse Prevention Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Session 1: Alcohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Session 2: Boredom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Session 3: Avoiding Relapse Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Session 4: Work and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Session 5: Guilt and Shame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Session 6: Staying Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Session 7: Motivation for Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Session 8: Truthfulness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Session 9: Total Abstinence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Session 10: Sex and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Session 11: Anticipating and Preventing Relapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Session 12: Trust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Session 13: Be Smart, Not Strong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Session 14: Defining Spirituality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Session 15: Managing Life; Managing Money . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Session 16: Relapse Justification I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Session 17: Taking Care of Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Session 18: Emotional Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Session 19: Illness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Session 20: Recognizing Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Session 21: Relapse Justification II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Session 22: Reducing Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Session 23: Managing Anger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Session 24: Acceptance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Session 25: Making New Friends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Session 26: Repairing Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Session 27: Serenity Prayer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Session 28: Compulsive Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
iv
Contents
Session 29: Coping With Feelings and Depression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Session 30: 12-Step and Mutual-Help Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Session 31: Looking Forward; Managing Downtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Session 32: One Day at a Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Elective Session A: Client Status Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Elective Session B: Holidays and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Elective Session C: Recreational Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Handouts for Relapse Prevention Group Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
VI. Social Support Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Social Support Group Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Appendices
Appendix A. The Methamphetamine Treatment Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Appendix B. Notes on Group Facilitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Appendix C. Sample Agreement for Co-Leaders and Client–Facilitators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Appendix D. Acronyms and Abbreviations List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Appendix E. Further Reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Appendix F. Field Reviewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Appendix G. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
v
I. Introduction to the Matrix Intensive
Outpatient Treatment for People
With Stimulant Use Disorders
Approach and Package
The Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment for
People With Stimulant Use Disorders (IOP) pack-
Background
age provides a structured approach for treating The Matrix IOP method was developed initially in
adults who abuse or are dependent on stimulant the 1980s in response to the growing numbers of
drugs. The approach followed in the treatment individuals entering the treatment system with
package was developed by the Matrix Institute in cocaine or methamphetamine dependence as
Los Angeles, California, and was adapted for this their primary substance use disorder. Many tradi-
treatment package by the Knowledge Application tional treatment models then in use were devel-
Program of the Center for Substance Abuse oped primarily to treat alcohol dependence and
Treatment of the Substance Abuse and Mental were proving to be relatively ineffective in treating
Health Services Administration (SAMHSA). The cocaine and other stimulant dependence (Obert
Matrix IOP package comprises five components: et al. 2000).
n Counselor’s Treatment Manual (this To create effective treatment protocols for

document) clients dependent on stimulant drugs, treatment
n Counselor’s Family Education Manual professionals at the Matrix Institute drew from
numerous treatment approaches, incorporating
n CD-ROM that accompanies the into their model methods that were empirically
Counselor’s Family Education Manual tested and practical. Their treatment model
n Client’s Handbook incorporated elements of relapse prevention,
cognitive–behavioral, psychoeducation, and
n Client’s Treatment Companion family approaches, as well as 12-Step program
support (Obert et al. 2000).
The Matrix IOP model and this treatment pack-
age based on that model grew from a need for The effectiveness of the Matrix IOP approach
structured, evidence-based treatment for clients has been evaluated numerous times since its
who abuse or are dependent on stimulant drugs, inception (Rawson et al. 1995; Shoptaw et al.
particularly methamphetamine and cocaine. This 1994). SAMHSA found the results of these stud-
comprehensive package provides substance ies promising enough to warrant further evalua-
abuse treatment professionals with an intensive tion (e.g., Obert et al. 2000; Rawson et al. 2004).
outpatient treatment model for these clients and
their families: 16 weeks of structured program- In 1998, SAMHSA initiated a multisite study of
ming and 36 weeks of continuing care. treatments for methamphetamine dependence
and abuse, the Methamphetamine Treatment
1
Project (MTP). The study compared the clinical attending Relapse Prevention group sessions.
and cost effectiveness of a comprehensive Overlapping Social Support group attendance
treatment model that follows a manual developed with the intensive phase of treatment helps
by the Matrix Institute with the effectiveness ensure a smooth transition to continuing care.
of treatment approaches in use at eight
community-based treatment programs, including The Matrix IOP method also familiarizes clients
six programs in California, one in Montana, and with 12-Step programs and other support groups,
one in Hawaii. Appendix A provides more teaches clients time management and schedul-
information about MTP. ing skills, and entails conducting regular drug
and breath-alcohol testing. A sample schedule of
Matrix IOP Approach treatment activities is shown in Figure I-1.
Overview Program Components

The Matrix IOP approach provides a structured This section describes the logistics and philosophy
treatment experience for clients with stimulant use of each of the five types of counseling sessions
disorders. Clients receive information, assistance that are components of the Matrix IOP approach.
in structuring a substance-free lifestyle, and sup- Detailed agendas and instructions for conduct-
port to achieve and maintain abstinence from ing each type of group and individual session
drugs and alcohol. The program specifically are provided in the designated sections of
addresses the issues relevant to clients who are this manual and in the Counselor’s Family
dependent on stimulant drugs, particularly Education Manual.
methamphetamine and cocaine, and their families.
The Matrix materials use step-by-step descriptions
For 16 weeks, clients attend several intensive to explain how sessions should be conducted.
outpatient treatment sessions per week. This The session descriptions are methodical
intensive phase of treatment incorporates because the treatment model is intricate and
various counseling and support sessions: detailed. Counselors who use these materials
may want additional training in the Matrix
n Individual/Conjoint family sessions approach, but these materials were designed so
(3 sessions) that counselors could implement the Matrix treat-
ment approach even without training. The Matrix
n Early Recovery Skills group sessions materials do not describe intake procedures,
(8 sessions) assessments, or treatment planning. Programs
n Relapse Prevention group sessions should use the procedures they have in place to
(32 sessions) perform these functions. If the guidelines pre-
sented in this manual conflict with the require-
n Family Education group sessions ments of funders or credentialing or certifying
(12 sessions) bodies, programs should adapt the guidelines
n Social Support group sessions as necessary. (For example, some States
(36 sessions) require that sessions last a full 60 minutes to
be funded by Medicaid.)
Clients may begin attending Social Support
groups once they have completed the 12- All Matrix IOP groups are open ended, meaning
session Family Education group but are still that clients may begin the group at any point
2
I. Introduction
Figure I-1. Sample Matrix IOP Schedule

Intensive Treatment Continuing Care
Weeks 13
Weeks 1 through 4* Weeks 5 through 16=
through 48
6:00–6:50 p.m. Early Recovery

Skills 7:00–8:30 p.m. Relapse
Monday Prevention
7:15–8:45 p.m. Relapse
Prevention
Tuesday 12-Step/mutual-help group meetings
7:00–8:30 p.m. Family

Education
7:00–8:30 p.m.
Wednesday 7:00–8:30 p.m. Family Education or
Social Support
7:00–8:30 p.m. Social
Support
Thursday 12-Step/mutual-help group meetings
6:00–6:50 p.m. Early Recovery

Skills 7:00–8:30 p.m. Relapse
Friday Prevention
7:15–8:45 p.m. Relapse
Prevention
Saturday and
12-Step/mutual-help group meetings and other recovery activities
Sunday
* 1 Individual/Conjoint session at week 1
= 2 Individual/Conjoint sessions at week 5 or 6 and at week 16
and will leave that group when they have manifest as clients’ difficulty recalling words or
completed the full series. Because the Matrix concepts. Repeating information in different
groups are open ended, the content of sessions ways, in different group contexts, and over the
is not dependent on that of previous sessions. course of clients’ treatment helps clients com-
The counselor will find some repetition of infor- prehend and retain basic concepts and skills
mation among the three Individual/Conjoint ses- critical to recovery.
sions as well as group sessions. Clients in early
recovery often experience varying degrees of
Individual/Conjoint Sessions
cognitive impairment, particularly regarding
short-term memory. Memory impairment can In the Matrix IOP intervention, the relationship
between counselor and client is considered the
3
primary treatment dynamic. Each client is and 8 for information about working with client
assigned one primary counselor. That counselor co-leaders). It is important that this group stay
meets individually with the client and possibly the structured and on track. The counselor needs to
client’s family members three times during the focus on the session’s topic and be sure not to
intensive phase of treatment for three 50-minute contribute to the high-energy, “out-of-control”
sessions and facilitates the Early Recovery Skills feelings that may be characteristic of clients in
and Relapse Prevention groups. The first and early recovery from stimulant dependence.
last sessions serve as “bookends” for a client’s
treatment (i.e., begin and end treatment in a way The ERS group teaches clients an essential set
that facilitates treatment engagement and contin- of skills for establishing abstinence from drugs
uing recovery); the middle session is used to and alcohol. Two fundamental messages are
conduct a quick, midtreatment assessment of the delivered to clients in these sessions:
client’s progress, to address crises, and to coor-
dinate treatment with other community resources 1. You can change your behavior in ways
when appropriate. that will make it easier to stay abstinent,
and the ERS group sessions will provide
Conjoint sessions that include both the client and you with strategies and practice opportu-
family members or other supportive persons are nities to do that.
crucial to keeping the client in treatment. The
2. Professional treatment can be one source
importance of involving people who are in a pri-
of information and support. However, to
mary relationship with the client cannot be over-
benefit fully from treatment, you also need
estimated; the Matrix IOP approach encourages
12-Step or mutual-help groups.
the inclusion of a client’s most significant family
member or members in each Individual/Conjoint
The techniques used in the ERS group ses-
session in addition to Family Education group
sions are behavioral and have a strong “how to”
sessions. The counselor who tries to facilitate
focus. This group is not a therapy group, nor is
change in client behavior without addressing
it intended to create strong bonds among group
family relationships ultimately makes the recov-
members, although some bonding often occurs.
ery process more difficult. It is critical for the
It is a forum in which the counselor can work
counselor to stay aware of how the recovery
closely with each client to assist the client in
process affects the family system and to include
establishing an initial recovery program. Each
a significant family member in part of every
ERS group has a clear, definable structure. The
Individual/Conjoint session when possible.
structure and routine of the group are essential
to counter the high-energy or out-of-control feel-
Early Recovery Skills Group ings noted above. With newly admitted clients,
Clients attend eight Early Recovery Skills (ERS) the treatment routine is as important as the
group sessions—two per week for the first information discussed.
month of primary treatment. These sessions
typically involve small groups (10 people maxi- Relapse Prevention Group
mum) and are relatively short (50 minutes).
The Relapse Prevention (RP) group is a central
Each ERS group is led by a counselor and
component of the Matrix IOP method. This
co-led by a client who is advanced in the pro-
group meets 32 times, at the beginning and end
gram and has a stable recovery (see pages 7
of each week during the 16 weeks of primary
4
I. Introduction
treatment. Each RP group session lasts and is often the first group attended by clients
approximately 90 minutes and addresses a and their families. The group provides a rela-
specific topic. These sessions are forums in tively nonthreatening environment in which to
which people with substance use disorders present information and provides an opportunity
share information about relapse prevention and for clients and their families to begin to feel
receive assistance in coping with the issues of comfortable and welcome in the treatment facili-
recovery and relapse avoidance. The RP group ty. A broad spectrum of information is presented
is based on the following premises: about methamphetamine dependence, other
drug and alcohol use, treatment, recovery, and
n Relapse is not a random event. the ways in which a client’s substance abuse
and dependence affect family members as well
n The process of relapse follows predictable
as how family members can support a client’s
patterns.
recovery. The group format uses PowerPoint
n Signs of impending relapse can be identi- slides, discussions, and panel presentations.
fied by staff members and clients.
The counselor personally invites family mem-
The RP group setting allows for mutual client bers to attend the series. The often negative
assistance within the guiding constraints provid- interactions within clients’ families just before
ed by the counselor. Clients heading toward beginning treatment can result in clients’ desire
relapse can be redirected, and those on a to “do my program alone.” However, Matrix
sound course to recovery can be encouraged. treatment experience shows that, if clients are
closely involved with significant others, those
The counselor who sees clients for prescribed significant others are part of the recovery
Individual/Conjoint sessions and a client co- process regardless of whether they are involved
leader facilitate the RP group sessions (see in treatment activities. The chances of treatment
pages 7 and 8 for information about working success increase immensely if significant others
with client co-leaders). become educated about the predictable
changes that are likely to occur within relation-
Examples of the 32 session topics covered in ships as recovery proceeds. The primary coun-
the RP group include selor educates participants and encourages
involvement of significant others, as well as
n Guilt and shame clients, in the 12-session Family Education
n Staying busy group. The material for the twelve 90-minute
Family Education group sessions is in the
n Motivation for recovery Counselor’s Family Education Manual.
n Be smart, not strong
n Emotional triggers Social Support Group (Continuing Care)
Clients begin attending the Social Support
group at the beginning of their last month in
Family Education Group
primary treatment and continue attending these
Twelve 90-minute Family Education group group sessions once per week for 36 weeks of
sessions are held during the course of the continuing care. For 1 month, intensive treat-
16-week program. This group meets once per ment and continuing care overlap.
week for the first 3 months of primary treatment
5
Social Support group sessions help clients learn who has experience with cognitive–behavioral
or relearn socialization skills. Persons in recov- and motivational approaches and has a familiari-
ery who have learned how to stop using sub- ty with the neurobiology of addiction will be best
stances and how to avoid relapse are ready to prepared to implement the Matrix IOP interven-
develop a substance-free lifestyle that supports tion. Appropriate counselor supervision will help
their recovery. The Social Support group assists ensure fidelity to the Matrix treatment approach.
clients in learning how to resocialize with clients
who are further along in the program and in their In addition to conducting the three Individual/
recovery in a familiar, safe environment. This Conjoint sessions, a client’s primary counselor
group also is beneficial to the experienced partic- decides when a client moves from one group to
ipants who often strengthen their own recovery another and is responsible for integrating mate-
by serving as role models and staying mindful of rial from the various group-counseling formats
the basic tenets of abstinence. These groups are into one coordinated treatment experience.
led by a counselor, but occasionally they may be
broken into smaller discussion groups led by a Each client’s primary counselor
client–facilitator, a client with a stable recovery
who has served as a co-leader and makes a n Coordinates with other counselors work-
6-month commitment to assist the counselor. ing with the client in group sessions (e.g.,
in Family Education sessions)
Social Support group sessions focus on a com-
n Is familiar with the material to which the
bination of discussion of recovery issues being
client is being exposed in the Family
experienced by group members and discussion
Education sessions
of specific, one-word recovery topics, such as
n Encourages, reinforces, and discusses
n Patience material that is being covered in 12-Step
or mutual-help meetings
n Intimacy
n Helps the client integrate concepts from
n Isolation
treatment with 12-Step and mutual-help
n Rejection material, as well as with psychotherapy or
psychiatric treatment (for clients who are
n Work
in concurrent therapy)
The Role of the Counselor n Coordinates with other treatment or social

services professionals who are involved
To implement the Matrix IOP approach, the with the client
counselor should have several years of experi-
ence working with groups and individuals. In short, the counselor coordinates all the
Although detailed instructions for conducting pieces of the treatment program. Clients need
sessions are included in this manual, a new the security of knowing that the counselor is
counselor may not have acquired the facility or aware of all aspects of their treatment. Many
the skills necessary to make the most of the people who are stimulant dependent enter
sessions. The counselor who is willing to adapt treatment feeling out of control. They are look-
and learn new treatment approaches is an ing to the program to help them regain control.
appropriate Matrix IOP counselor. The counselor If the program appears to be a disjointed series
of unrelated parts, these clients may not feel
6
I. Introduction
that the program will help them regain control, clients bring a wealth of experience to group
which may lead to unsuccessful treatment sessions. As persons who are recovering suc-
outcomes or premature treatment termination. cessfully, the client co-leaders are in a position
Appendix B provides more notes on the coun- to address controversial, difficult issues from a
selor’s role in group facilitation. perspective similar to that of clients in the
group, often by sharing personal experiences.
In facilitating sessions, the counselor should be The client co-leaders also are able to strength-
sensitive to cultural and other diversity issues en their recovery in the process and give back
relevant to the specific populations being to the program and to other clients.
served. The counselor needs to understand cul-
ture in broad terms that include not only obvious Client co-leaders should be chosen carefully.
markers such as race, ethnicity, and religion, Clients may be considered for co-leading an
but also socioeconomic status, level of educa- ERS group if they meet the following criteria:
tion, and level of acculturation to U.S. society.
The counselor should exhibit a willingness to n A minimum of 8 weeks of uninterrupted
understand clients within the context of their cul- abstinence from illicit drugs and alcohol
ture. However, it is also important to remember
n Regular attendance at scheduled RP
that each client is an individual, not merely an
group and Individual/Conjoint sessions
extension of a particular culture. Cultural back-
grounds are complex and are not easily n A willingness to serve as co-leaders once
reduced to a simple description. Generalizing or twice a week for at least 3 months
about a client’s culture is a paradoxical practice.
An observation that is accurate and helpful Clients may be considered for co-leading an RP
when applied to a cultural group may be mis- group if they meet the following criteria:
leading and harmful when applied to an individ-
ual member of that group. The forthcoming n A minimum of 1 year of uninterrupted
Treatment Improvement Protocol Improving abstinence from illicit drugs and alcohol
Cultural Competence in Substance Abuse n Completion of the Matrix IOP intervention
Treatment (CSAT forthcoming) provides more (i.e., completed 1 year of treatment)
information on cultural competence.
n Active participation in a Social Support
Working With Client group and attending 12-Step or mutual-

help group meetings
Co-Leaders and n A willingness to serve as co-leaders once
Client–Facilitators or twice a week for at least 6 months
Using clients as group co-leaders is an essen- When selecting client co-leaders, the counselor
tial part of the Matrix IOP approach. Clients who also should consider whether clients are
have completed at least the first 8 weeks of the respected by other group members and are
program and been abstinent over that period able to work well with the counselor.
can be client co-leaders for ERS groups. Ideally,
client co-leaders for RP groups will have com- The counselor should ask client co-leaders to
pleted the full year of Matrix treatment and been sign a formal agreement; an example of such
abstinent over that period. These advanced an agreement is in Appendix C.
7
Before clients begin serving as co-leaders, the

counselor needs to orient them to the role. Client
The Matrix IOP Package
co-leaders need to understand the following: In addition to this Counselor’s Treatment Manual
(introduced in detail on page 9), the Matrix IOP
n They are not counselors; their input needs package consists of these components:
to be made in the first person (e.g., “What
helped me was …” rather than “You n Client’s Handbook—This illustrated hand-
should …”). book contains an introduction and welcome
n They must maintain the confidentiality of and all the handouts that are used in the
group participants. Matrix IOP program, except for those used
in the Family Education group sessions.
n They need to be willing to talk to the Counselors will notice that the Client’s
counselor about any issues or problems Handbook uses large type and has art on
that arise for them while they serve as most of the pages. People in recovery from
co-leaders. stimulant use experience memory impair-
ments. But these impairments are much
The counselor should meet with the co-leader worse for word recall than for picture recall.
before each group session to discuss briefly the Clinical experience has shown that clients
topic and any issues that might arise. After each respond better to the Matrix approach
group session, the counselor should meet again when the treatment materials are accom-
with the co-leader to panied by pictures and visual cues.
n Make sure the co-leader is not distressed If the counselor has enough copies of the
by anything that occurred during group Client’s Handbook to distribute one book
to each client, he or she should do so. If
n Discuss briefly how the group went and not, the counselor should make copies of
provide feedback on anything the co- the handouts (either from the Counselor’s
leader did particularly well or that could Treatment Manual or from the Client’s
use improvement (e.g., monopolizing the Handbook) and give one set to each
conversation, confronting a client inappro- client at the client’s first ERS session.
priately, giving advice rather than relating Clients keep their handbooks at the clinic,
his or her own experience) take notes in them, and are given them to
keep when they graduate from the Matrix
Meeting regularly with client co-leaders provides intervention.
opportunities for the counselor and co-leaders
to improve the way they work together and to Note: During the course of MTP, which
maximize the benefits to the co-leaders and served as the model for this treatment
other group members. manual, copies of the Client’s Handbook
were stored in a locked cabinet until
Clients who have served as co-leaders for group members arrived, when clients
ERS or RP group sessions can act as client– retrieved their handbooks for use during
facilitators for Social Support group sessions. the session. In the interests of client
The counselor should follow the guidelines confidentiality, clients put only their first
above when selecting and working with names on the handbooks; no other client-
client–facilitators. identifying information was listed.
8
I. Introduction
n Counselor’s Family Education Manual and Support). The presentation of each type of
Slide Presentations—The Counselor’s session begins with an overview that includes
Family Education Manual contains a discussion of
w Introductions to the Matrix IOP package n The general format and flow of the
and to the manual individual or group sessions
w Instructions for conducting each session n Any special considerations relevant to the
particular type of session
w Handouts for participants
n The overall goals for each type of session
Session instructions are presented in a
format similar to that provided for the The overview is followed by instructions for
other types of sessions. conducting each specific session. These
instructions include
The Counselor’s Family Education
Manual is accompanied by a CD-ROM
n The goals of the session
containing slide presentations for 7 of the
12 sessions. n A list of client handouts
n Client’s Treatment Companion—The n Notes to the counselor about anything to

Client’s Treatment Companion is for clients keep in mind during the session
to carry with them in a pocket or purse. It
n Topics for group discussion, including key
contains useful recovery tools and con-
points to cover
cepts and provides space for clients to
record their relapse triggers and cues, n Guidelines for helping clients recognize
write short phrases that help them resist their progress, manage their time, and
triggers, and otherwise personalize the address any concerns they have about
book. Ideas are included for ways to per- time management
sonalize and make the Client’s Treatment n Homework assignments for clients
Companion a useful tool for recovery.
Copies of the handouts that make up the
Introduction to the Client’s Handbook are located at the end of
each section’s instructions for easy reference.
Counselor’s Treatment The counselor should review thoroughly the
Manual session instructions before conducting each
group or individual session.
This manual contains all the materials necessary
for a counselor to conduct individual and group Readers who are interested in learning more
sessions using the Matrix IOP approach. After the about the Matrix approach to treatment for
introductory sections, this manual is organized by stimulant use disorders will find a list of articles
type of session (i.e., Individual/Conjoint, Early for further reading in Appendix E.
Recovery Skills, Relapse Prevention, and Social
9
II. The Role of Drug and Breath-
Alcohol Testing in Matrix IOP
Philosophy Procedure
In the Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment for This section assumes that the counselor’s pro-
People With Stimulant Use Disorders (IOP) gram has established procedures for collecting,
model, drug and breath-alcohol testing is identifying, storing, ensuring chain of custody
viewed and presented to clients as a valuable for collecting, and transporting specimens. If
tool to help clients become abstinent and enter drug screens are required (e.g., if they have
recovery, not as a punitive monitoring measure. been ordered by the court), clients should be
Its use should not be presented or perceived as so informed.
an indication of mistrust of a client’s honesty.
Instead, the counselor should help clients Testing Schedule
accept that people in outpatient treatment for In the Matrix IOP approach, all clients are
substance use disorders need as many tools asked to provide a urine or saliva specimen for
as possible to recover. To regain control of their drug analysis and to take a breath-alcohol test
lives, clients need ways to impose structure on once each week. Occasionally, the testing day
their behavior. should be random but should be on a day that
most closely follows a period of high risk (e.g.,
Urine or saliva drug and breath-alcohol test weekends, payday). Unexplained missed
results can provide invaluable clinical data when appointments, unusual behavior in sessions or
a lapse or relapse has occurred and the client is groups, or family reports of unusual behavior
unable to talk about it. The occurrence of relapse may indicate a need for immediate testing. The
and, often, denial of use make testing for sub- counselor should be sensitive to possible client
stances an essential component of outpatient embarrassment and avoid any unnecessary
substance abuse treatment programs. public discussion or joking about the tests.
The goals of testing for substances in treatment A program can screen for a client’s
include substance of choice or for a broad range of
substances. The program may want to use
n Deterring a client from resuming Breathalyzer™ screening every time or only
substance use when alcohol use is suspected. Full drug
n Providing a counselor with objective infor- screens should be done when the counselor
mation about a client’s substance use suspects other substance use.
n Providing a client who is denying use with

Addressing Tampering
objective evidence of use
Occasionally a client may attempt to conceal
n Identifying a substance use problem drug use by tampering with a urine specimen.
severe enough to warrant residential or At the time the suspect specimen is submitted,
hospital-based treatment
11
the client should be taken into a private setting

and told that there is some uncertainty about
Addressing a Positive
the specimen. Staff members should not be Urine Test
accusatory and should attempt to make the
client comfortable. However, staff persons A positive drug test is a significant event in
should avoid tension-relieving jokes that might treatment. It might mean one use, or it might
communicate the wrong message about the indicate a return to chronic use. In response to
purpose or importance of urine specimen a positive result, the counselor should take the
collection and testing. following steps:
Tampered urine specimens usually indicate n Reevaluate the period surrounding the
substance use. Clients who alter their specimens test. Were there other indications of a
rarely admit it. Specimen tampering is a critical problem such as missed appointments,
concern in treatment and may signal a relapse. unusual behavior, discussions in treat-
Drug use combined with denial may reflect a ment sessions or groups, or family reports
breakdown of the therapeutic process. If a of unusual activity?
client attempts to alter more than one specimen n Give the client an opportunity to explain
sample, it may be necessary to observe the the result, for example, by stating, “I
client giving another sample immediately and on received a positive result from the lab on
subsequent testing occasions until the client’s your urine test from last Monday. Did any-
abstinence is reasonably verified. Doing so thing happen that weekend you forgot to
should be viewed as a last resort to establish the tell me about?”
client’s drug use and to encourage truthfulness.
n Avoid discussion about the validity of the
If a situation warrants observing urine collection, results (e.g., the lab could have made an
the counselor should consult with a supervisor error; the bottle might have been mixed
for approval and direction. The counselor up with another client’s).
should follow the agency’s policy and proce- n Consider temporarily increasing the
dures for observing urine collection. Observing frequency of testing to determine the
urine specimen collection is uncomfortable for extent of use.
staff members and may be humiliating for the
n Reinforce a client’s honesty if he or she
client. Urine collection procedures should be
admits to use, and stress the therapeutic
explained to the client at the first individual
importance of the admission. This interac-
session including the possibility that urine
tion may result in admissions of other
collections may be observed occasionally.
instances of substance use that had gone
An observed urine collection procedure is a last undetected.
resort for clients who are having difficulties in n Collaborate with corrections or court staff
the recovery process. It is important to view this as appropriate.
procedure as a therapeutic activity. In many
cases, drug testing can move clients back on Sometimes a client responds to the news of a
track and prompt them to tell the truth about positive urine test with a partial confession of
drug use. drug involvement, for instance, that he or she
12
II. The Role of Drug and Breath-Alcohol Testing
was at a party and was offered drugs but did increasing the frequency of a client’s visits. For
not use them. These partial confessions are example, the counselor could place a client back
often the closest the client can get to actually into the Early Recovery Skills group if the client
admitting drug use. has already completed those group sessions but
has had repeated positive test results, or more
Occasionally a client reacts angrily to notifica- individual sessions could be scheduled for a
tion of positive test results. Typically, the client client who is at an earlier stage in the treatment
may accuse the counselor of lack of trust and process. If a client continues to have positive
display indignation at the suggestion of drug drug tests, the counselor may be required to
use. These reactions can be convincing and refer the client to a higher level of care.
may cause a counselor initially to react defen-
sively. However, the counselor calmly should Even if the client denies drug or alcohol use,
inform the client that discussing a positive test the counselor must proceed as if there were
result is necessary for treatment and that the use. Lapses should be analyzed with the client
counselor’s questioning is in the client’s best (possibly in an individual session), and a plan
interest. If the client is unresponsive to these for avoiding relapse reformulated. It may
explanations, the counselor should attempt to become necessary to assess the need for inpa-
move on to other issues. At some other time, tient or residential treatment. The counselor’s
the topic of truthfulness may be revisited and confidence in and certainty of the test results
the client given another opportunity to discuss are critical at this point and may be instrumental
the urine test result. in inducing an honest explanation from the
client of what has been happening. If the urine
A client should not be discharged from the Matrix testing process succeeds in documenting out-
IOP intervention because of positive drug test or of-control drug use and establishes the need for
Breathalyzer results. If there are repeated positive increasing the intensity of outpatient treatment
test results, however, it may be necessary for the or considering residential or hospital-based
counselor to stress that abstinence is the goal treatment, it has served a valuable function.
of the Matrix IOP approach and to consider
13
III. Individual/Conjoint Sessions
Introduction crisis. The counselor should be mindful that
violence can erupt in this kind of environment.
Goals of Individual/Conjoint Sessions A concern for the safety of the client and the
family members involved in treatment should be
n Provide clients and their families with an
foremost in the counselor’s mind.
opportunity to establish an individualized
connection with the counselor and learn
Starting individual sessions on time is important.
about treatment.
The client should feel that the visit is an impor-
n Provide a setting where clients and their tant part of the counselor’s day. The counselor
families can, with the counselor’s guid- should try to accommodate the client by sched-
ance, work out crises, discuss issues, uling individual sessions at convenient times.
and determine the continuing course of
treatment. Generally, the counselor sees each client alone
for the first half of the session and then invites
n Allow clients to discuss their addiction
family members to join the client for the second
openly in a nonjudgmental context with
half. This arrangement should be communicat-
the full attention of the counselor.
ed to the client and family members before they
n Provide clients with reinforcement and arrive for the sessions so that family members
encouragement for positive changes. can bring along something to occupy them for
the first 25 minutes of the session.
Session Guidelines
Three individual sessions are scheduled in the Session Format and Counseling
Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment for People Approach
With Stimulant Use Disorders (IOP) model. The connection between the client and counselor
These sessions are 50 minutes long. The initial is the most important bond that develops in treat-
session orients the client to treatment, and the ment. The counselor should use common sense,
final session helps the client plan for posttreat- courtesy, compassion, and respect in interacting
ment recovery; these are the first and last ses- with the client and family members.
sions of the client’s Matrix IOP experience. The
remaining session should be scheduled 5 or 6
Session 1: Orientation
weeks into treatment or when a client has
relapsed or is experiencing a crisis. This session The client’s family members may be included
focuses on assessing the client’s progress, sup- for the orientation portion of the first session.
porting successes, and providing resources to Family members are informed of how the Matrix
keep recovery strong. Whenever possible, the IOP approach works and what is expected of
counselor should involve the client’s family or the client. The counselor also explains how
other significant and supportive persons in the family members can support the client’s recov-
individual sessions; these are called conjoint ery and answers questions the client or family
sessions. Substance abuse can place a family in members have.
15
Session 2: Client Progress/Crisis Intervention who has not exercised, needs to be given
During the second session, the counselor unqualified reinforcement for the accomplish-
ensures that the client and family members ments. The counselor should mention that
have an opportunity to describe urgent issues the client would benefit from exercise, but the
and to discuss emotionally charged topics. counselor should not engage in a struggle over
During the first portion of the session, when the one area of resistance.
counselor meets alone with the client, the coun-
selor determines whether urgent issues, such Session 3: Continuing Treatment Planning
as strong cravings or a relapse, need to be
The final Individual/Conjoint session is also
addressed immediately. If a crisis needs to be
one of the final sessions of Matrix intensive
addressed, the counselor may want to bring the
outpatient treatment. The counselor reviews the
family members into the session earlier than the
client’s treatment experience and underscores
halfway point.
the importance of recovery activities (e.g.,
scheduling, exercise, regularly attending a
If the client’s recovery is going well, the coun-
12-Step program) that help prevent relapse.
selor introduces the scheduled material for the
The counselor works through a goal-setting
session. Any positive changes in the client’s
exercise with the client and helps the client plan
behavior or attitude need to be strongly rein-
steps that will make the goals attainable. The
forced. For example, a client who has done a
client is encouraged to work on issues that may
good job of stopping drug and alcohol use,
have been put on hold during treatment, such
scheduling, and attending group sessions, but
as couples or family therapy.
16
Session 1: Orientation
Goals of Session
n Help clients understand what is expected of them during treatment.
n Orient clients and their family members to the Matrix IOP approach.
n Help clients make a treatment schedule.
n Enlist family members’ help in supporting clients’ recovery.
Handout
n IC 1—Sample Service Agreement and Consent
Session Content
This session is conducted before the first group session and gives the client and family members an
opportunity to meet the counselor and learn about the program. The counselor also uses this session
to ensure that the client and family members are oriented properly to treatment. At this session, the
counselor gives each client a copy of the Client’s Treatment Companion. Programs should not distrib-
ute the Client’s Handbook during the orientation session. Clients receive the Client’s Handbook during
the first group session. Clients have their own copies and make personal use of them but should not
take them home. Programs collect and store the handbooks in a secure location until clients return for
the next group session. (Programs may choose to give clients photocopies of the handouts from the
Client’s Handbook, rather than provide an individual copy of the book to each client.)
After greeting the client and family members, the counselor gives them a brief overview of the Matrix
IOP model. This overview takes about 10 minutes and includes the following:
n A general introduction to the principles on which the Matrix IOP model is based (see pages 1–6)
n A description of the various components of the Matrix IOP model
w Individual/Conjoint group sessions
w Early Recovery Skills group sessions

w Relapse Prevention group sessions
w Social Support group sessions
w Urine and breath tests
w 12-Step or mutual-help group attendance
n A program schedule that shows the client and family members what a typical week of the Matrix
IOP intervention looks like and how sessions change as the client moves through treatment (see
Figure I-1, page 3)
17
The counselor brings to the session a list of the program’s Matrix IOP meetings and times. With the
counselor’s help, each client selects a schedule. The counselor then provides a copy of this schedule
to the client. The goal is for the client to leave the session with a copy of the schedule and a clear
idea of what the next steps are.
The counselor gives the client a copy of the program’s service agreement and consent form.
(Handout IC 1—Sample Service Agreement and Consent is provided as an example of such a form;
programs are free to use or adapt this form if they do not have service agreement and consent forms
of their own.) The counselor reads aloud while the client and family members follow along. It is impor-
tant for the counselor to take time going over this document; the counselor should pause after each
numbered item on the form to be sure the client understands what he or she is initialing. The coun-
selor should ensure that the client understands the consequences for not abiding by the agreement.
The counselor allows ample time for questions during and at the end of the session. It is imperative that
the client and family members feel knowledgeable about and comfortable with the Matrix IOP approach.
18
Session 2: Client Progress/Crisis Intervention

Goals of Session
n Help clients assess progress.
n Help clients address any crises they may be experiencing.
n Reinforce recovery principles clients have learned in treatment.
Handouts
n IC 2A—Recovery Checklist
n IC 2B—Relapse Analysis Chart
Session Content
The second Individual/Conjoint session is conducted about 5 or 6 weeks after a client enters treat-
ment. The counselor begins the session by briefly discussing with the client how the recovery is
progressing. At this point, the session can take one of two different directions, depending on the
client’s response:
n If the client’s recovery is on track, this session is used to assess progress, review relapse pre-
vention skills, give positive reinforcement for the client’s successes, and identify areas in which
the client can improve. The client completes handout IC 2A—Recovery Checklist. The counselor
either reads the handout with the client or gives the client a few minutes to complete it.
The counselor reviews the client’s answers with the client. It is important that the counselor
praise the client’s progress before moving on to the final two questions on the handout, which
address relapse prevention activities the client may be struggling to implement. The counselor
may wish to make reference to Early Recovery Skills and Relapse Prevention session descrip-
tions or handouts when reviewing recovery skills with the client. Useful session descriptions and
handouts include
w Early Recovery Skills sessions 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 (in Section IV)

w Handout IC 2B (in this section)
w Handouts ERS 3B, 5, 6A, 6B, and 7B (in Section IV)
w Handout SCH 1 (in Section IV)
w Relapse Prevention sessions 3, 7, 11, 13, 16, 18, and 21 (in Section V)
w Handouts RP 3A, 3B, 4, 8, 12, 13, 17, 19, and 22 (in Section V)
n If the client has been struggling with recovery or is experiencing a personal crisis, the counselor
spends the session addressing these issues, allowing time for the client to talk about what is
going on and, when appropriate, developing a plan to help the client maintain or get back to
19
recovery. If a client recently has had a relapse or feels that a relapse is imminent, the client
completes handout IC 2B—Relapse Analysis Chart. The counselor can read the handout with
the client or give the client a few minutes to complete it. The goal of completing this sheet and
discussing it is to sensitize the client to the events and feelings that precede a relapse. The
counselor may wish to refer to the notion of “mooring lines” that keep recovery anchored, as
discussed in Relapse Prevention session 3 (Avoiding Relapse Drift) and its accompanying hand-
outs, RP 3A and 3B. The session descriptions and handouts listed above also may make the
client aware of the subtle ways in which behavior can imperil recovery.
Relapse does not occur suddenly or unpredictably, although it often feels that way to the client.
The counselor needs to help the client understand the context of the relapse. Handout IC 2B—
Relapse Analysis Chart helps the client see relapse as an event that both has antecedents and
can be avoided. Many people who successfully complete outpatient treatment experience a
relapse at some point in the process. The critical issue is whether the client continues the recov-
ery process following the relapse. The counselor should stress to the client that relapse does
not indicate failure; it should be viewed as an indication that the treatment plan needs adjusting.
20
Session 3: Continuing Treatment Planning

Goals of Session
n Help clients evaluate their progress in recovery.
n Help clients set continuing treatment goals.
n Help clients draft a continuing treatment plan.
Handouts
n Handout IC 3A—Treatment Evaluation
n Handout IC 3B—Continuing Treatment Plan
Session Content
The final Individual/Conjoint session is scheduled when the client is about to complete or after he or
she has completed 16 weeks of the Matrix IOP intervention (i.e., after clients have completed Family
Education and Relapse Prevention sessions). The counselor begins the discussion by asking the
client general questions about the treatment experience:
n What aspects of treatment have been most helpful?
n Were there parts of treatment that have not been helpful? What were they?
n What would you change about treatment, if you could?
n How are you a different person now than you were when you entered treatment?
n Have you started attending Social Support group sessions? How have they helped you?
The counselor then works with the client to complete handout IC 3A—Treatment Evaluation, addressing
the eight categories listed on the left side of the handout and helping the client evaluate behavioral
changes, current status, and hoped-for progress. Examining the discrepancy between the client’s current
situations and the goals often generates motivation for the client to formulate steps to reach the desired
goals. The counselor encourages the client to make the goals realistic and helps the client set realistic
timetables for achieving the goals.
After the client has identified goals and established timetables, the counselor goes over handout IC
3B—Continuing Treatment Plan, stressing the importance of ongoing therapy and attending Social
Support group sessions and 12-Step or mutual-help meetings. The counselor should think of this
session as the final opportunity for case management. Earlier group sessions underscored the impor-
tance of continuing with 12-Step or mutual-help meetings after the end of treatment. During those
sessions, the counselor provided the client with a list of local meetings and discussed ways to facili-
tate the client’s attendance. The counselor should provide the client with another copy of the list of
meetings and discuss in detail the client’s plans for attending meetings.
21
The client uses items from handout IC 3A—Treatment Evaluation to draft a continuing recovery plan at
the end of handout IC 3B—Continuing Treatment Plan. The counselor assists the client in writing this
plan. The counselor helps the client finish treatment with a clear understanding of how to maintain recov-
ery, with short- and long-term recovery goals and with a realistic plan for accomplishing those goals.
Handouts for Individual/Conjoint Sessions

The handouts that follow are to be used by the client and the counselor to make the most of the three
Individual/Conjoint sessions.
22
IC 1 Sample Service Agreement
and Consent
[Each program uses an agreement and consent form that it has developed to meet its particular needs.
This form is provided as a sample.]
It is important that you understand the kinds of services you will be provided and the terms and
conditions under which these services will be offered.
I, _____________________________________________, am requesting treatment from the staff of

___________________________________________. As a condition of that treatment, I acknowledge
the following items and agree to them. (Please initial each item.)
I understand:
_____ 1. The staff believes that the outpatient treatment strategies the program uses provide a
useful intervention for chemical dependence problems; however, no specific outcome can
be guaranteed.
_____ 2. Treatment participation requires some basic ground rules. These conditions are essential for
a successful treatment experience. Violation of these rules can result in treatment termination.
I agree to the following:

a. It is necessary to arrive on time for appointments. At each visit I will be prepared to take
urine and breath-alcohol tests.
b. Conditions of treatment require abstinence from all drug and alcohol use for the entire
duration of the treatment program. If I am unable to make this commitment, I will discuss
other treatment options with the program staff.
c. I will discuss any drug or alcohol use with the staff and group while in treatment.
d. Treatment consists of individual and group sessions. Individual appointments can be

rescheduled, if necessary. I understand that group appointments cannot be rescheduled and
attendance is extremely important. I will notify the counselor in advance if I am going to miss
a group session. Telephone notification may be made for last-minute absence or lateness.
e. Treatment will be terminated if I attempt to sell drugs or encourage drug use by other clients.
f. I understand that graphic stories of drug or alcohol use will not be allowed.
1 of 2
IC 1 Sample Service Agreement
and Consent
g. I agree not to become involved romantically or sexually with other clients.
h. I understand that it is not advisable to be involved in any business transactions with other clients.
i. I understand that all matters discussed in group sessions and the identity of all group
members are absolutely confidential. I will not share this information with nonmembers.
j. All treatment is voluntary. If I decide to terminate treatment, I will discuss this decision with
the staff.
_____ 3. Staff: Services are provided by psychologists, licensed marriage and family counselors,
master’s-level counselors-in-training, or other certified addiction staff people. All nonlicensed
counselors are supervised by a licensed counselor trained in the treatment of addictions.
_____ 4. Consent to Videotape/Audiotape: To help ensure the high quality of services provided by the
program, therapy sessions may be audiotaped or videotaped for training purposes. The client
and, if applicable, the client’s family consent to observation, audiotaping, and videotaping.
_____ 5. Confidentiality: All information disclosed in these sessions is strictly confidential and may not
be revealed to anyone outside the program staff without the written permission of the client
or the client’s family. The only exceptions are when disclosures are required or permitted by
law. Those situations typically involve substantial risk of physical harm to oneself or to others
or suspected abuse of children or the elderly.
_____ 6. Accomplishing treatment goals requires the cooperation and active participation of clients
and their families. Very rarely, lack of cooperation by a client may interfere substantially
with the program’s ability to render services effectively to the client or to others. Under such
circumstances, the program may discontinue services to the client.
I certify that I have read, understand, and accept this Service Agreement and Consent. This
agreement and consent covers the length of time I am involved in treatment activities at
this facility.
Client’s Signature: __________________________________________ Date: _____________
2 of 2
IC 2A Recovery Checklist
Outpatient treatment requires a great deal of motivation and commitment. To get the most
from treatment, it is necessary for you to replace many old habits with new behaviors.
Check all the things that you do regularly or have done

since entering treatment:
c Schedule activities daily c Avoid triggers (when possible)
c Visit physician for checkup c Use thought stopping for cravings
c Destroy all drug paraphernalia c Attend Individual/Conjoint sessions
c Avoid people who use alcohol c Attend Early Recovery Skills and
c Avoid people who use drugs Relapse Prevention sessions
c Avoid bars and clubs c Attend 12-Step or mutual-help meetings
c Stop using alcohol c Get a sponsor
c Stop using all drugs c Exercise daily
c Pay financial obligations promptly c Discuss thoughts, feelings, and behav-
iors honestly with your counselor
c Identify addictive behaviors
What other behaviors have you decided to start since you entered
treatment?
Which behaviors have been easy for you to do?
Which behaviors take the most effort for you to do?
Which behavior have you not begun yet? What might need to change
for you to begin this behavior?
Behavior Not Begun Change Needed

Name: ________________________________________ Date of Relapse: _______________
A relapse episode does not begin when you take a drug. Often, things that happen before you use
indicate the beginning of a relapse. Identifying your patterns of behavior will help you recognize and
IC 2B
interrupt the relapse. Using the chart below, note events that occurred during the week immediately
before the relapse.
Drug-
Career Personal Treatment Related Behavioral Relapse Health
Events Events Events Behaviors Patterns Thoughts Status
Feelings about the above events

Relapse Analysis Chart
Recovery requires specific actions and behavioral changes in many areas of life. Before you end your
treatment, it is important to set new goals and plan for a different lifestyle. This guide will help you
develop a plan and identify the steps necessary for reaching your goals. Write your current status and
goals for the areas of life listed in the left column.
IC 3A
What steps do
Where are Where would
Subject you need When?
you now? you like to be?
to take?
Family
Work/Career
1 of 2
Friendships
Treatment Evaluation
Financial, Legal
Obligations
What steps do
Where are Where would
Subject you need When?
you now? you like to be?
to take?
IC 3A
Education
Exercise
2 of 2
Leisure
Activities
12-Step or
Mutual-Help
Meetings
Treatment Evaluation
___________________________________ _________ _________________________________ ________

Client’s Signature Date Counselor’s Signature Date
IC 3B Continuing
Treatment Plan
Recovery is a lifelong process. You can stop drug and
alcohol use and begin a new lifestyle during the first 4 months of treatment.
Developing an awareness of what anchors your recovery is an important part of that
process. But this is only the beginning of your recovery. As you move forward with
your recovery after treatment, you will need a lot of support. And you may need
different kinds of support than you did during treatment. You and your counselor can
use the information below to help you decide how best to support your recovery.
Group Work
You should participate in at least one regular recovery
group every week after treatment. The program offers a
Social Support group that meets once a week. Other
recovery groups are often available in the community.
Ask your counselor about local recovery groups.
Individual Therapy
Individual sessions with an addiction counselor might be helpful. When your current
treatment ends, you have choices about continuing with therapy. You may choose this
time to enter therapy with another professional. You may want to return to therapy with
the professional who referred you for the Matrix IOP method. Or you may choose to
continue to see your current Matrix IOP counselor.
Couples Therapy
It is often a good idea at this point for couples to begin seeing a marriage counselor
together to work on relationship issues.
12-Step or Mutual-Help Meetings

Attendance at a 12-Step or mutual-help meeting is a critical part of the recovery
process. It is essential to find a meeting that you will attend regularly.
1 of 2
IC 3B Continuing
Treatment Plan
My plan for the months following treatment is:
__________________________________________________________ _____________
Client’s Signature Date
__________________________________________________________ _____________
Counselor’s Signature Date
2 of 2
IV. Early Recovery Skills Group
Introduction The counselor and co-leader should meet for
15 minutes before the start of each group session
Goals of Early Recovery Skills Group to go over the session’s topic and new issues
about individual clients. No confidential information
n Provide a structured group meeting for
can be given to the client co-leader. He or she is a
new clients to learn about recovery skills
volunteer and a client, not an employee. The co-
and 12-Step and mutual-help programs.
leader should be instructed to share experiences
n Introduce clients to the basic tools of about the topic and not attempt to be a counselor.
recovery and aid clients in stopping drug After each group session, the counselor should
and alcohol use. debrief the co-leader to ensure that the co-leader
is refocused and stabilized, if necessary.
n Introduce 12-Step or mutual-help involve-
ment and create an expectation of partici-
pation as part of treatment. Group and Session Characteristics
n Help clients adjust to participation in a The ERS component comprises eight group
group setting such as Relapse Prevention sessions that are held twice per week during
(RP) or Social Support group sessions or the first month of intensive treatment. A typical
12-Step or mutual-help meetings. ERS group is small (6–10 people), and sessions
are relatively short (approximately 50 minutes).
n Allow the recovering co-leader to provide a ERS sessions cover a substantial amount of
model for strengthening initial abstinence. material in a short time; counselors may need
n Provide the recovering co-leader with to move briskly from topic to topic. This group
increased self-esteem and reinforce his must stay structured and on track. The coun-
or her progress. selor and co-leader should be serious and
focused and not contribute to the high-energy,
Session Format and Counseling out-of-control feeling that may characterize
Approach clients in early recovery.
Counselor and Co-Leader The counselor begins every session by stating

The Early Recovery Skills (ERS) group is led by that the group’s objective is to teach basic
a counselor and co-led by a recovering client. abstinence skills. All clients are introduced and
This co-leader is usually a current client with asked to state how far they have progressed in
more than 8 weeks of abstinence. The client treatment. First-time participants should be
must be progressing successfully through the given several minutes to give a brief history.
program, abstaining from using drugs and Clients giving detailed drug or alcohol histories
drinking, and actively participating in an outside can be interrupted politely and asked to discuss
recovery group. The counselor should invite issues that prompted treatment. Any time a new
clients from the program’s RP group who meet client joins the ERS group, the counselor should
these criteria to fill the role of recovering co- explain the importance of scheduling and mark-
leader. The co-leader should be paired up with ing progress, regardless of which ERS session
the same counselor for 3 months. is the client’s first. The instructions for session 1
31
in ERS go into detail about scheduling. The previous session’s homework assignment. All
instructions for session 2 in ERS discuss mark- clients must have a plan for the time between the
ing progress in detail. The recovering co-leader current session and the next session. The more
is introduced as someone who is currently rigorously clients can plan, the more likely it is
going through the recovery process and who that they will abide by their schedules and avoid
can give a personal account of how the pro- relapse. The goal is to map every day until the
gram is working for him or her. next ERS group meeting. After scheduling is
explained in the first ERS session, 5 minutes is
The ERS sessions should begin on a positive set aside in each session for this activity. The
note by emphasizing benefits that each client counselor should use part of this time to allow
derives from recovery and the length of time clients to discuss successes and challenges with
clients have remained abstinent. Five minutes is scheduling. Specific Alcoholics Anonymous (AA),
set aside after introductions so clients can place Cocaine Anonymous, Narcotics Anonymous, or
a mark on their calendar handout for each day mutual-help meetings can be suggested. Clients
of abstinence, share positive stories with the should be discouraged from planning activities
group, and encourage other members. with one another or other clients in early recovery,
except for meeting one another at 12-Step or
Following the marking of progress, the coun- mutual-help meetings. Following up on clients’
selor introduces the new topic, tells participants homework also should take the form of a brief
which handouts from their Client’s Handbook discussion. The counselor should strive to involve
they will use for the current session, gives an all clients, fostering in them an interest in com-
overview of why this topic is important to clients’ pleting the homework and an understanding that
recovery and abstinence, and discusses the working on recovery takes full-time commitment.
topic with clients in the group. The session out-
lines that follow have specific questions and At the end of group sessions, any clients who
suggestions to structure and enrich discussions. will be moving on can be given several minutes
The counselor should use these questions but to discuss what benefits the ERS group has
may find that clients have other concerns that provided in their first month of abstinence. Any
the questions do not address. The counselor clients who are struggling should be able to
should feel free to take the discussion in direc- meet briefly with their counselor or schedule a
tions that will be most helpful to the group. The time to do so. The recovering co-leader is not
recovering co-leader can relate how each topic to engage in one-on-one counseling. There is
was useful during the early stages of his or her a 15-minute break between the ERS group
recovery. The counselor should ask all partici- session and the RP group session.
pants to describe how they can use the skills
being discussed. If clients are having problems, Special Considerations
the counselor can solicit advice from other Clients in the ERS group probably have
group members, and the counselor and recov- achieved only brief periods of abstinence. Their
ering co-leader can offer suggestions. About 35 behavior may require that the counselor some-
minutes is spent on group topics. times intervene and assert control in a strong,
yet tactful fashion. The examples below illus-
The remaining part of each ERS group session is trate how to handle some common situations.
devoted to scheduling and to following up on the
32
Clients Who Spend Too Much Time n Avoid arguing with reluctant clients or
Describing Episodes of Substance Use trying to compel them to attend 12-Step
Failing to interrupt and redirect a client who is meetings.
going into detail about episodes of use can turn n Provide clients with a list of local meetings
the session into an unstable experience that and encourage clients to attend different
might trigger some clients to relapse. The meetings until they find one that feels
counselor should comfortable.
n Make it clear to clients new to the group n Encourage clients who are resistant to the
that it is inappropriate for anyone to go spiritual aspects of 12-Step or mutual-help
into detail about episodes of substance programs to attend for the fellowship and
use or feelings that led to using support. Social activities, coffee after the
meetings, and the availability of others to
n Interrupt a client who begins to talk in call in times of trouble are encouraging
detail about using aspects of participation for ambivalent
n Remind the group that such talk can lead members.
to relapse
Those who feel uncomfortable going to unfamil-
n Pose a new question or topic for iar meetings in the community may want to
discussion attend them with the recovering co-leader or
other group members. Program graduates may
Clients Who Resist Participation in 12-Step, want to start a 12-Step meeting at the treatment
Mutual-Help, or Other Spiritual Groups center, providing clients with a way to become
familiar with 12-Step or mutual-help group
In discussions about 12-Step or mutual-help
philosophies and meeting structures while in a
program involvement, clients frequently express
familiar environment.
dissenting opinions about the value of participa-
tion. Resistance to 12-Step or mutual-help
Some clients may be willing to attend 12-Step
group involvement is an important issue. To
meetings but resist getting a sponsor and work-
address client concerns, the counselor should
ing the steps. It is important to allow clients to
engage in 12-Step activities on their schedules,
n State clearly that the treatment outcome
when they are ready. The more involved clients
for people who attend 12-Step or mutual-
are in a 12-Step or mutual-help program, the
help programs is better than for people
stronger their recovery is likely to be. Clients
who do not. The Matrix Institute has con-
should choose a sponsor who is accepting of
ducted several surveys on treatment out-
concurrent involvement in professional treatment.
comes and 12-Step or mutual-help pro-
gram involvement and consistently has
Clients who are looking for an alternative to
found a strong positive relationship.
traditional 12-Step programs should be encour-
However, clients may state that they do
aged to explore the following groups:
not find meetings helpful and are not
going to attend.
n Women for Sobriety (www.
n Acknowledge that it is not uncommon for womenforsobriety.org) helps women
people initially to find participating in such overcome alcohol dependence through
programs uncomfortable. emotional and spiritual growth.
33
n Jewish Alcoholics, Chemically Dependent n Maintains a polite and respectful attitude

Persons and Significant Others (JACS) toward all members of the group while
(www.jacsweb.org) helps people explore remaining clearly in control
recovery in a nurturing Jewish environment.
n Redirects the conversation as in the
n Self-Management and Recovery Training example that follows
(SMART) (www.smartrecovery.org) is a
cognitive–behavioral group approach that Client A states that her prescribed antide-
focuses on self-reliance, problemsolving, pressants are not helping with her depres-
coping strategies, and a balanced lifestyle. sion and are making her tired. Client B
says, “You should really just stop taking
n Secular Organizations for Sobriety (www.
your antidepressants. If you’re tired, you
secularhumanism.org) maintains that
may end up relapsing to meth because
sobriety is a separate issue from religion
you can’t stay awake during the day.
or spirituality and credits the individual for
You’ve worked so hard to quit using meth
achieving and maintaining sobriety.
and remain abstinent.” The counselor
n Community-based spiritual fellowships, should step in at this point to address the
which take place in churches, syna- situation. “Client B, although I know you
gogues, mosques, temples, and other have good intentions, Client A needs to
spiritually focused meeting sites, often discuss her medication with her doctor.
form the basis for support, lifestyle But you raise an important point: being
change, and clarification of values in tired can be a trigger for relapse. Let’s talk
peoples’ lives. about how thought stopping can help you
cope with triggers when they arise.”
The counselor should consult local directories
for these groups and be prepared to provide Clients Who Cannot Take Direction or Limit
contact information, if clients request. Their Input
Sometimes, unstable clients are unable to take
Note: The list of alternatives to 12-Step programs subtle direction or appropriately limit their input.
is referred to in session 4 and session 8 of ERS In situations such as these, the counselor should
and in session 30 of RP. The counselor should
take a copy of this list to every session, in case a n Defuse the situation by saying something
client requests information. like, “You have a lot of energy tonight.
Let’s make sure everyone has a chance
Clients Who Provide Inaccurate or to talk. Just listen for a while.”
Dangerous Suggestions to Other Clients n Address the client directly and ask the
Clients sometimes may provide suggestions client to cease the disruptive behavior, if
during group meetings that are inaccurate or the counselor’s attempt to defuse the
possibly dangerous. When a client makes a situation does not succeed.
potentially harmful recommendation to another
n Ask the client to leave the group for
client, the counselor
that session, if the disruptive behavior
continues.
34
n Speak with the client alone after the group benefit from repeating the ERS group while
meeting about his or her specific problem, they attend RP sessions. Once the counselor
if possible. determines that these clients have stabilized,
they may stop attending ERS sessions and
A client who is disruptive or out of control may attend only RP sessions.
be experiencing an attention deficit disorder or
a more serious mental disorder. Counselors
Rational Brain Versus Addicted Brain
should be alert to the possibility of co-occurring
substance use and mental disorders and make The ERS group session descriptions use the
referrals to appropriate psychiatric care when metaphorical struggle between a client’s rational
necessary. brain and addicted brain as a way to talk about
recovery. The terms rational brain and addicted
brain do not correspond to physiological regions
Clients Who Appear Intoxicated of the brain, but they give clients a way to con-
If a client seems intoxicated, the counselor should ceptualize the struggle between the desire to
stay committed to recovery and the desire to
n Ask the client to step outside the session begin using stimulants again.
room with the counselor. The recovering
co-leader can continue the group while the
Adapting Client Handouts
counselor attempts to evaluate the client’s
condition and discusses the circumstances Client handouts are written in simpler language
leading to the drug or alcohol use, if no than the session descriptions for counselors.
other counselor is available or the client is The client materials should be understandable
not capable of engaging in treatment. for someone with an eighth grade reading level.
Difficult words (e.g., abstinence, justification)
n Help the client find another counselor on are occasionally used. Counselors should be
site who can work with the client, if the prepared to help clients who struggle with the
client is capable of engaging productively material. Counselors should be aware that
in one-on-one treatment. handouts will need to be adapted for clients with
n Ensure that the client has safe transporta- reading difficulties.
tion home and forgo any discussion of the
matter until the next treatment appoint- Session Descriptions
ment, depending on the degree of the Pages 37–56 provide structured guidance to the
client’s intoxication. counselor for organizing and conducting the
eight ERS group sessions in the intensive out-
n Avoid confrontation.
patient program. The handouts indicated in the
session guidance are provided after the session
Clients Who Relapse descriptions for the counselor’s use and are
Clients who are beyond the first month of duplicated in the Client’s Handbook. Figure IV-1
treatment but have relapsed and are struggling provides an overview of the eight ERS sessions.
to impose structure on their recovery may
35
Figure IV-1. Early Recovery Skills Sessions Overview

Session
Topic Content Pages
Number
Clients learn about triggers and cravings and how they are
Stop the related to substance use. Clients learn to use thought-
1 Cycle stopping techniques to disrupt relapse and scheduling to
37–39
organize their recovery.
Identifying
Clients learn to identify their external triggers and that
2 External
charting their external triggers can help prevent relapse.
40–42
Triggers
Identifying
Clients learn to identify their internal triggers and that
3 Internal
charting their internal triggers can help prevent relapse.
43–44
Triggers
Introducing Clients learn about the format, benefits, and challenges of

12-Step or 12-Step programs and about 12-Step meetings in their area.
4 Mutual-Help Clients also learn about alternatives to 12-Step meetings,
45–47
Activities such as mutual-help groups.
Body Clients learn that their bodies must adjust to recovery as they
5 Chemistry work through the stages of recovery. Clients identify ways to 48–49
in Recovery overcome the physical challenges posed by recovery.
Common
Clients learn new coping techniques that do not involve
Challenges
6 in Early
substance use. Clients identify challenging situations and 50–51
ways to address them that help maintain abstinence.
Recovery
Clients learn how thoughts and emotions contribute to

Thinking,
behavior and that responses to thoughts and emotions can
7 Feeling,
be controlled. Clients identify behaviors that are related to
52–54
and Doing
substance use.
Clients learn 12-Step sayings and identify situations in which

12-Step
8 Wisdom
they will use them. Clients also learn to recognize when they 55–56
are most vulnerable to relapse.
36
Session 1: Stop the Cycle

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand what triggers and cravings are.
n Help clients identify individual triggers.
n Help clients understand how triggers and cravings can lead to use.
n Help clients learn techniques for stopping thoughts that can lead to use.
n Help clients learn the importance of scheduling time.
Handouts
n ERS 1A—Triggers
n ERS 1B—Trigger–Thought–Craving–Use
n ERS 1C—Thought-Stopping Techniques

n SCH 1—The Importance of Scheduling
n SCH 2—Daily/Hourly Schedule
Topics for Group Discussion (35 minutes)

1. Discussing the Concept of Triggers
Over time certain people, places, things, situations, and even emotions become linked with substance
use in the mind of the person who abuses substances. Being around those triggers can bring on a
craving for the substance, which can lead to use.
n Go over handout ERS 1A—Triggers.
n Ask clients to identify their triggers on the handout.

n Discuss specific things that have acted as triggers for clients.
n Ask clients to think about possible triggers they will face when they leave the program.
n Introduce the importance of scheduling to avoid triggers; the last 15 minutes of this session (and
the last 5 minutes of every other ERS session) is devoted to clients’ scheduling their time from
the end of one session to the beginning of the next.
2. Discussing Cravings
Cravings are impulsive urges to use that have a physiological basis. Cravings will not stop just
because clients have decided not to use. Clients will need to alter their behavior to avoid the triggers
that can lead to cravings. Planning for behavior changes will accomplish much more than mere good
intentions and strong commitment will.
37
n Discuss how clients will have to change their behaviors to avoid triggering cravings.
n Discuss the importance of removing paraphernalia associated with substance use.
n Ask what changes clients already have made to reduce cravings. What effect have these
changes had?
n Have the recovering co-leader discuss how the intensity of cravings has changed over time as a
result of behavior changes. It is important for clients to know that cravings will subside eventually.
3. Discussing the Principle of Thought Stopping

In addition to changing behaviors to avoid triggers, clients can interrupt the sequence that leads from
trigger to thinking about using to craving and then to using. Even though the triggering of cravings
seems like an automatic process, clients still can avoid using by stopping their thoughts about using.
n Go over handout ERS 1B—Trigger–Thought–Craving–Use.

n Help clients understand that cravings do not have to overwhelm them; they can block the
thoughts that lead to cravings.
n Have clients discuss the images that will help them stop their thoughts of using.
4. Discussing and Practicing Thought-Stopping Techniques

Thought stopping is a useful skill if clients practice it. When they encounter a trigger to use, clients
must be able to use thought-stopping techniques to break the link between thinking of using and
cravings. Clients should know that triggers do not automatically lead to using; by stopping their
thoughts, clients can choose not to use.
n Go over handout ERS 1C—Thought-Stopping Techniques.
n Discuss with clients which of the four techniques (visualization, snapping, relaxation, calling
someone) they think will be most helpful to them.
n Solicit suggestions for concrete applications of the techniques. What will clients visualize? What
will they do to relax? Whom will they call?
n Make it clear to clients that thought-stopping techniques will hold cravings at bay, buying clients
time until they can take action (e.g., go to a meeting, work out at the gym).
n Have clients suggest other techniques that might help them stop their thoughts about using
(e.g., taking a walk, going to a movie, taking a bath).
n Emphasize to clients that cravings will pass; most only last 30 to 90 seconds.
n Have the co-leader discuss thought-stopping techniques that work for him or her.
38
Scheduling (15 minutes)

One of the main goals of scheduling is to ensure that the rational part of clients’ brains takes charge of
their behavior rather than the emotional addicted part of their brains where cravings start. When
clients make a schedule and stick to it, they put their rational brains in charge. People in outpatient
treatment need to structure their time if they are serious about recovery. It is important for clients to
plan their activities and to write them down in their schedules. Schedules that exist only in one’s head
are too easy to revise or abandon. Clients need to schedule every hour of the day and stick to the
schedule. When clients are making their schedules, special attention should be paid to weekends and
any other times clients feel they are particularly vulnerable to substance use.
n Go over handout SCH 1—The Importance of Scheduling.
n Help clients understand that scheduling their time rigorously and sticking to the schedule are
part of the recovery process. Scheduling will help clients’ rational brains govern their behavior
and aid them in making good decisions.
n Have clients complete handout SCH 2—Daily/Hourly Schedule; encourage them to be thorough
in their scheduling, leaving no holes in their schedules.
Clients will undertake this scheduling exercise at the close of all eight sessions in the ERS portion of
treatment. Fifteen minutes is allotted to this activity in session 1 so that the counselor can introduce it.
In sessions 2 through 8, 5 minutes is devoted to scheduling, and a new activity—marking progress—is
added to the beginning of each session.
Homework
Encourage clients to use pages 6 and 7 of their Client’s Treatment Companion to keep a log of the
triggers they encounter and how they combat them. Encourage clients to keep a list of thought-
stopping techniques that work best for them.
39
Session 2: Identifying External Triggers

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand what external triggers are.
n Help clients identify individual external triggers.
n Help clients understand how external triggers can lead to use.
n Help clients review the need for scheduling to avoid external triggers.
n Help clients learn the importance of marking recovery progress.
Handouts
n CAL 1—Marking Progress
n CAL 2—Calendar
n ERS 2A—External Trigger Questionnaire

n ERS 2B—External Trigger Chart
Marking Progress (5 minutes)

Keeping a daily record of abstinence keeps clients mindful that their recovery is a day-to-day process.
Marking progress also allows clients to take pride in how far they have come. Clients who are newly
abstinent may experience a distortion in which time seems to pass more slowly than when they were
using substances. Charting their progress in short units may make the daunting process of recovery
seem more manageable. The first 5 minutes of each session in the ERS portion of treatment is
devoted to this activity.
n Go over handout CAL 1—Marking Progress.
n Have clients place a checkmark on each day on handout CAL 2—Calendar for which they have
not used substances.

1. Discussing the Concept of External Triggers
In session 1, clients learned what triggers are and identified and discussed specific triggers. Now
they undertake a more detailed examination of situations and circumstances that are linked to using
substances. The counselor helps clients understand that external triggers are aspects of their lifestyle
and the choices they make that are under their control. These are things that they can change.
n Go over handout ERS 2A—External Trigger Questionnaire.
n Have clients place a checkmark next to all external triggers that apply to them and a zero next
to those that do not.
40
n Encourage clients to think of external triggers that are not on the handout and list these
separately.
n Have clients list situations and people who are not linked with substance use for them (i.e., who
are “safe”).
n Discuss clients’ external triggers.
n Review the method for responding to triggers discussed in session 1 (ERS 1C—Thought-
Stopping Techniques).
n Review the importance of scheduling to avoid triggers.
2. Charting External Triggers

Now that clients have made lists of their external triggers and of those people, places, and situations
that are “safe,” clients can classify them according to the strength of their association with substance
use. Completing the External Trigger Chart (ERS 2B) helps clients realize that an episode of using
substances is not set off by random events. Clients also realize that they have the knowledge to help
themselves avoid substance use. By altering their behavior, clients can exercise control and reduce
the chances of using substances. The counselor can encourage clients to bring this chart (and ERS
3B—Internal Trigger Chart [discussed in session 3]) to their individual counseling sessions to help
address issues with triggers. Clients should keep this chart handy and add triggers to it, if new triggers
arise (see Homework below).
n Go over handout ERS 2B—External Trigger Chart.
n Have clients list people, things, and situations on the chart, rating them for their potential as
triggers.
n Encourage clients to share those items that are particularly troublesome and those that they feel
are “safe.”
n Have the recovering co-leader discuss how using the External Trigger Chart has helped him or
her understand and gain control of triggers.
The counselor should remind clients that scheduling their time rigorously and sticking to the schedule
are part of the recovery process. People who abuse substances are not accountable to schedules;
taking responsibility for sticking to a schedule helps clients stop using. Following through on decisions
made during scheduling helps keep clients’ rational brains in charge of behavior.
n Ask clients how the schedule they made at the end of the previous session helped them remain
drug free.
n Ask clients what they learned about scheduling that will affect how they make future schedules.
n Have clients complete handout SCH 2—Daily/Hourly Schedule for the time between this session
and session 3.
41
Homework (5 minutes)
Ask clients to share briefly their experience of doing the homework from the previous session. The
counselor can decide how detailed the followup on homework should be. The goal of asking is not to
discover which clients have not done the homework but to encourage clients to work on their recovery
between sessions and to share that work with the group.
Encourage clients to update their list of external triggers on handout ERS 2B—External Trigger Chart
as their recovery continues.
42
Session 3: Identifying Internal Triggers

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand what internal triggers are.
n Help clients identify individual internal triggers.
n Help clients understand how internal triggers can lead to use.
n Help clients understand the individual thoughts and emotions that act as triggers.
n Help clients review the importance of scheduling and marking progress.
Handouts
n CAL 2—Calendar
n ERS 3A—Internal Trigger Questionnaire
n ERS 3B—Internal Trigger Chart

Before introducing the session topics, the counselor gives clients time to chart their progress on CAL 2—
Calendar and encourages clients to share positive events they have experienced since the last session.

1. Discussing the Concept of Internal Triggers
In session 1 clients learned what triggers are and identified and discussed specific triggers. Now
they undertake a more detailed examination of thoughts and emotions that are linked with using
substances. Early recovery can be a chaotic time, especially emotionally. Many clients may feel
depression, shame, fear, confusion, or self-doubt. Although clients may feel that their thoughts and
emotions are not under their control during this time, the counselor can help clients understand that
how they respond to those internal triggers is under their control.
n Go over handout ERS 3A—Internal Trigger Questionnaire.
n Have clients place a checkmark next to all internal triggers that apply to them and a zero next to
those that do not. Clients also should include thoughts or emotions that once acted as triggers,
even if they no longer do.
n Have clients complete the rest of the handout, with special attention to thoughts or emotions that
have triggered recent use.
n Discuss clients’ internal triggers. As clients describe their internal states, reflect back what they
say and ask whether it is accurate.
n Review the method for responding to triggers discussed in session 1 (ERS 1C—Thought-
Stopping Techniques).
43
n Discuss other ways that clients can cope with triggers. If a certain internal state is no longer a
problem for a client, have that client share how he or she got control over the internal trigger.
2. Charting Internal Triggers

Now that clients have listed their internal triggers, they should classify the triggers according to the
strength of their association with substance use, just as they did for their external triggers. Charting
their internal triggers allows clients to identify particularly safe and unsafe emotional states, which, in
turn, should help them anticipate and head off problems. Completing the Internal Trigger Chart (ERS
3B) helps clients visualize the choices they make and the consequences of those choices. By seeking
to avoid situations that provoke dangerous emotions, clients can exercise control over their recovery.
The counselor can encourage clients to bring this chart (and ERS 2B—External Trigger Chart) to their
individual counseling sessions to help address issues with triggers. Clients should keep the Internal
Trigger Chart handy and add triggers to it, if new triggers arise (see Homework below).
n Go over handout ERS 3B—Internal Trigger Chart.

n Have clients list thoughts and emotions on the chart, rating them for their potential as triggers.
n Encourage clients to share the items that are particularly troublesome and those that they feel
are “safe.”
n Have the recovering co-leader discuss how using the Internal Trigger Chart has helped him or
her understand and gain control of triggers.
drug free.
and session 4.
Encourage clients to update their list of internal triggers on handout ERS 3B—Internal Trigger Chart
as their recovery continues.
44
Session 4: Introducing 12-Step or Mutual-Help Activities

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the structure and format of 12-Step programs.
n Help clients identify the challenges and benefits of participating in 12-Step programs.
n Help familiarize clients with options for local 12-Step meetings.
n Help clients recognize that participation in 12-Step or mutual-help programs is integral to recovery.
n Help clients review the importance of scheduling and marking progress.
Handouts
n CAL 2—Calendar
n ERS 4A—12-Step Introduction
n ERS 4B—The Serenity Prayer and the 12 Steps of Alcoholics Anonymous


Before introducing the session topics, the counselor gives clients time to chart their progress on
CAL 2—Calendar and encourages clients to share positive events they have experienced since the
last session.

1. Discussing Clients’ Prior Participation in 12-Step or Mutual-Help Programs
Participation in a 12-Step or mutual-help program during and after treatment is central to recovery.
Clients should view 12-Step or mutual-help group participation as important to their recovery as
attending treatment sessions. Research shows that a combination of professional substance abuse
treatment and participation in 12-Step support groups is often the most effective route to recovery. The
most important aspect of 12-Step or mutual-help group participation is that it surrounds clients with
supportive people who are going through the same struggles. Participation in a 12-Step or mutual-help
group also reinforces the message that recovery is not an individual process. The client must do the
work of quitting substance use, but the knowledge and support of others who have remained abstinent
are essential to recovery.
n Ask how many clients have participated in 12-Step or mutual-help programs.
n Ask those who have participated to share briefly their negative experiences with meetings. The
recovering co-leader can start this discussion, if clients are reticent. Negative experiences might
include the following:
w Some people in meetings are not interested in change.
45
w It is hard to reveal problems, even (or especially) in front of strangers.
w The structure is too rigid.
w Meetings are too time consuming.
w The spiritual elements are intrusive.
w Going to meetings can make one feel like using again.
n Ask clients who have not attended meetings to express their concerns about 12-Step or
mutual-help group participation.
n Ask clients who have participated in 12-Step or mutual-help programs to share their positive
experiences. Again, the recovering co-leader can initiate this discussion.
2. Discussing Clients’ Knowledge of 12-Step Programs

The preceding discussion gives the counselor a good idea of clients’ understanding of the structure
and processes of 12-Step meetings. Meetings can have different characteristics. If clients do not feel
that the first meeting they try suits them, they should try to find one with which they are more comfort-
able. It is important for clients to know that many different types of meetings are available, especially
in metropolitan areas, including language-specific meetings, gender-specific meetings, open meetings,
meetings based on participants’ sexual orientation, and meetings for people who also have a mental
disorder (“double trouble” or Dual Recovery Anonymous meetings).
n Go over handout ERS 4A—12-Step Introduction.
n Go over handout ERS 4B—Serenity Prayer and the 12 Steps of Alcoholics Anonymous.
n Emphasize that meetings are not religious but spiritual. Clients decide for themselves what the
higher power of the 12 Steps refers to. Metropolitan areas may have special secular 12-Step
meetings. Crystal Meth Anonymous (CMA) is a 12-Step program for people who are in recovery
from methamphetamine dependence. CMA meetings can be found in many large cities and
some smaller communities, especially in the West, Midwest, and South.
n Early in recovery, encourage clients to find a home meeting and attend as many meetings as
their schedule permits.
n Stress the importance of finding and working with a sponsor.
n Have the recovering co-leader tell his or her story of finding a 12-Step meeting to attend and
how doing so has helped him or her.
n Share with clients information about the 12-Step programs in the area. Ensure that you are
knowledgeable about the characteristics of each group program. Provide a list of programs—
with addresses, phone numbers, contacts, and a brief description—to each client.
46
3. Introducing Alternative Mutual-Help Groups

The counselor should research local options to 12-Step programs and expose clients to other types of
recovery support in addition to 12-Step programs. Many clients find help from the organizations listed
on pages 33 and 34.
drug free.
and session 5.
Encourage clients to attend at least one 12-Step or mutual-help meeting before session 5.
47
Session 5: Body Chemistry in Recovery

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that recovery is a physical process that requires the body to adjust.
n Help clients understand specific physical symptoms that may occur during recovery.
n Help clients identify the stages of recovery and the challenges associated with them.
n Help clients consider ways to overcome the physical challenges of early recovery.
Handouts
n CAL 2—Calendar
n ERS 5—Roadmap for Recovery

last session.

1. Discussing Recovery as a Physical Process
In addition to experiencing behavioral and emotional changes while in recovery, clients also experience
physical changes. Clients’ bodies also must adjust. The chemistry of the brain is altered by habitual
substance use; clients can think of this adjustment period as a “healing” of the brain. During early recovery
clients may experience symptoms such as depression, low energy, sleep disturbances, headaches,
and anxiety. These symptoms are part of the body’s healing process. If clients understand this, they are
better able to focus on their recovery. Good nutrition, exercise, sufficient sleep, relaxation, and leisure
activities to reduce stress may be beneficial, particularly during the early stages of recovery.
n Ask clients to share their experiences with prior attempts at recovery.
n Ask clients what physical symptoms they experienced during recovery. How long did these
symptoms persist?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share personal experiences of the physical difficulties of early
recovery. What strategies or activities helped the recovering co-leader through the physical
discomfort of early recovery?
2. Discussing the Stages of Recovery

Recovery from stimulant use can be divided into four stages: withdrawal, early abstinence (a.k.a. the
Honeymoon), protracted abstinence (a.k.a. the Wall), and readjustment. These four stages were
48
originally developed to describe recovery from cocaine addiction. The length of time for various stages
may vary for other stimulants. For example, because methamphetamine has a longer half-life in the
body than cocaine, recovery from methamphetamine will lag behind the time periods listed on handout
ERS 5—Roadmap for Recovery. The stages are a rough outline of the progress of recovery, and
every client’s experience is different. However, being familiar with the typical changes and challenges
that come with recovery helps prepare clients for them.
n Go over handout ERS 5—Roadmap for Recovery. Explain to clients that the time periods listed
provide a general outline of recovery and that their recovery may take slightly longer.
n For each stage, focus on the substances that people in the group had been using (e.g., if no one
in the group used opioids, focus on stimulants and alcohol).
n Ask clients to discuss the symptoms they are experiencing.
n Caution clients about the intense cravings and risk of impulsive actions during the first 2 weeks
of abstinence—the withdrawal stage. Also be certain that clients are aware of the challenges
posed by the stage known as the Wall. Most relapses occur during one of these two stages.
n Remind clients of the need to continue attending treatment sessions and 12-Step or mutual-help
meetings, even if, after several weeks of abstinence, they feel as if their substance use is
behind them.
drug free.
and session 6.
Encourage clients to try one new activity or strategy to combat the physical symptoms of early
abstinence. Remind them to eat well, exercise, get enough sleep, and try new leisure activities.
49
Session 6: Common Challenges in Early Recovery

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that it is necessary to find new coping techniques that do not involve
substance use.
n Help clients identify challenges and new solutions that maintain abstinence.
n Help clients understand the importance of stopping alcohol use.
Handouts
n CAL 2—Calendar
n ERS 6A—Five Common Challenges in Early Recovery
n ERS 6B—Alcohol Arguments

last session.

1. Discussing Challenges Clients Often Face in Early Recovery
Many aspects of clients’ lives require change if clients are to maintain abstinence. But certain areas and
situations have proved to be particularly troublesome for people in recovery. Examining the five chal-
lenges listed on ERS 6A and discussing solutions help clients address these challenges more effectively.
In the past, clients probably turned to substance use when they encountered one of these problem
situations. Part of the recovery process is learning a new repertoire of responses to cope with these
situations. Recovery consists of assembling new coping techniques one solution at a time. The wider the
variety of coping techniques clients can call on, the better they are able to manage their problems.
n Go over handout ERS 6A—Five Common Challenges in Early Recovery with clients.
n Ask clients what solutions they think will be helpful to them when they face these scenarios. Do
clients have suggested solutions that are not listed?
n Ask clients which challenges are particularly troublesome. How do they plan to address them?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss how he or she handled these common early recovery
challenges.
n Remind clients of the importance of scheduling. Many of the solutions on the handout involve
planning abstinent outings or setting aside time for new activities. Rigorous scheduling helps
clients maintain their abstinence.
50
2. Discussing the Importance of Stopping Alcohol Use

Some clients have problems giving up alcohol; some feel that giving up stimulants is enough work
without making another major life adjustment. As discussed in session 5, when the Honeymoon stage
ends after about 6 weeks of treatment, clients may experience intense cravings for stimulants. This
also is the time when many clients return to alcohol use. Seeing no connection between alcohol and
stimulants, clients may try to rationalize their return to alcohol use. It is important for clients to under-
stand that it is necessary to abstain from alcohol to allow the brain to heal and that abstaining from
alcohol will help them abstain from stimulants.
n Go over handout ERS 6B—Alcohol Arguments.
n Ask clients whether they have had some of these “arguments” with themselves. What other
rationalizations for using alcohol have clients faced?
n Ask clients how they have responded to these rationalizations.
n Draw on the recovering co-leader’s experience to help clients address their rationalizations of a
return to alcohol use. What strategies has the co-leader used to abstain from alcohol?
drug free.
and session 7.
When clients are confronted with a problem, encourage them to try one of the alternatives discussed
on handout ERS 6A—Five Common Challenges in Early Recovery. In addition to the arguments
listed on handout ERS 6B—Alcohol Arguments, have clients think of another argument for remaining
abstinent from alcohol and record it in their Client’s Treatment Companion on page 8.
51
Session 7: Thinking, Feeling, and Doing

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the connections among thoughts, emotions, and behavior.
n Help clients understand how thoughts and emotions contribute to behavior.
n Help clients understand that responses to thoughts and emotions can be controlled.
n Help clients identify behaviors that are related to substance use.
Handouts
n CAL 2—Calendar
n ERS 7A—Thoughts, Emotions, and Behavior
n ERS 7B—Addictive Behavior


1. Discussing Connections Among Thoughts, Emotions, and Behavior
Many people assume that thoughts and emotions happen outside their control. Because they feel that
they cannot influence or change their thoughts and emotions, these people may not consider the effects
that their thoughts and emotions can have on behavior. In session 1, the group discussed how emotions
can act as triggers for substance use and how thoughts, if not stopped, can lead to cravings. It is impor-
tant for clients to become aware of thoughts and emotions, to be able to observe and analyze them.
Clients can look for patterns in their thoughts and emotions. They also can pay attention to how their
thoughts and feelings are expressed in body language, physical changes, and behavior. Attuned to their
thoughts and feelings, clients are better able to recognize which thoughts and emotions are connected to
substance use. This recognition helps clients exercise control over their responses.
n Go over handout ERS 7A—Thoughts, Emotions, and Behavior.
n Ask clients about the differences between thoughts and emotions. How do clients respond
to each?
n Review thought-stopping techniques, and ask clients to share the visualizations they use to stop
thoughts of using.
n State that usually positive emotions (e.g., excitement, joy, gratitude) are considered good things.
What are some positive emotions that can lead to substance use?
52
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss how he or she controls thoughts and emotions.
n Ask clients what connections they can make between thoughts and behavior and between
emotions and behavior.
n Remind clients of the importance of scheduling. Planning time thoroughly is one way of gaining
control of behavior. Attending 12-Step or mutual-help meetings, finding new activities, and
resuming old hobbies also are good ways of steering behavior in productive directions.
2. Discussing the Importance of Recognizing Early Movement Toward Addictive Behaviors

People who abuse substances often feel that their behavior is out of their control because they experi-
ence uncontrollable urges to use substances. By breaking down a behavior into the steps that precede
it, clients are able to control how they respond to urges. In session 1, clients learned about thought-
stopping techniques (handout ERS 1C) that can interrupt the sequence of events that leads to craving
and then to using substances. Another way to prevent the reemergence of addictive behaviors is for
clients to recognize the early warning signs of substance abuse: behaviors that clients know are linked
to substance abuse for them. Clients cannot maintain a successful recovery from substance abuse if
they continue to engage in the behaviors that accompanied substance abuse.
n Go over handout ERS 7B—Addictive Behavior.
n Ask clients to assess honestly which behaviors from the list on the handout are related to their
substance abuse.
n Ask clients what behaviors that place them at risk for relapse are not listed.
n Ask clients to think about how they can monitor their behavior (e.g., regular 12-Step attendance,
keeping a diary, staying in touch with their sponsors).
n Ask clients what they will do to avoid returning to substance use if they recognize that they have
slipped into one of these addictive behaviors.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share experiences with addictive behaviors and how he or she
avoided relapsing to substance use.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to describe the benefits of being vigilant about addictive behaviors.
drug free.
53
and session 8.
Have clients use pages 10 and 11 in their Client’s Treatment Companion to list a feeling that is linked
with substance use, then list three ways of coping with that feeling that do not involve substance use.
54
Session 8: 12-Step Wisdom

Goals of Session
n Help clients identify 12-Step sayings that are helpful in recovery.
n Help clients identify situations in which 12-Step sayings are helpful.
n Help clients understand that people are more vulnerable to relapse when they are hungry, angry,
lonely, or tired.
Handouts
n CAL 2—Calendar n ERS 8—12-Step Sayings n SCH 2—Daily/Hourly Schedule


1. Discussing the Usefulness of 12-Step Sayings
Many sayings that originated in Alcoholics Anonymous and became part of other 12-Step programs
have taken root in popular discourse, too. Such phrases as “One day at a time” and “Keep it simple”
may be familiar even to clients who have not participated in a 12-Step program. Because the phrases
are familiar, clients may take them for granted. The counselor should present these sayings in the
context of 12-Step programs so that clients can understand their value. The direct approach to
recovery that these sayings convey can be used to support the usefulness of 12-Step participation.
n Go over handout ERS 8—12-Step Sayings (up to discussion of the HALT acronym).
n Ask clients which 12-Step sayings they find useful. Why?
n Ask clients to imagine situations in which they would call on these phrases for strength or
encouragement.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss what 12-Step wisdom means and how it has helped him
or her in recovery.
2. Using 12-Step Wisdom To Avoid Relapse

The counselor explains the acronym, HALT. Clients who have participated in 12-Step programs before
will be familiar with it and should be called on to help explain its importance. Recovery is a process of
returning the body to a normal, healthy state. Controlling hunger by eating regularly is an important
part of recovery. Anger is a frequent cause of relapse; it can drag clients down, making them feel bitter
and resentful. It is important for clients to learn how to recognize and control anger. Loneliness is a
common experience for clients in recovery; clients may feel isolated from friends and loved ones. The
supportive fellowship of others in recovery helps combat loneliness. Feeling tired is often a warning
sign of a relapse. Along with eating well, regular exercise and rest mitigate fatigue.
55
n Go over the HALT acronym presented in handout ERS 8—12-Step Sayings.
n Ask clients to share their answers to the questions at the end of the handout.
n Ask clients which of the HALT states poses the greatest relapse risk for them. What strategies
will help them avoid the relapse pitfalls mentioned in HALT?
n Ask clients what other relapse risks exist for them. List these and perhaps make an acronym
that represents them.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to explain how HALT has helped him or her avoid relapse.
3. Offering an Alternative Approach

recovery support in addition to 12-Step programs. Many clients find help from the organizations listed
on pages 33 and 34.
drug free.
and their next treatment group session.
This is the final session of the Early Recovery Skills portion of treatment. Have clients take some time
to reflect on what they have learned. Encourage them to write on pages 10 and 11 of their Client’s
Treatment Companion and describe how they will use the skills they have learned to help them in
their recovery.
Handouts for Early Recovery Skills Group Sessions

The handouts that follow are to be used by clients with the counselor’s guidance. The handouts will
help clients make the most of the eight ERS sessions.
56
SCH 1 The Importance
of Scheduling
Scheduling may be a difficult and boring What if I Am Not an Organized
task if you’re not used to it. It is, however, Person?
an important part of the recovery Learn to be organized. Buy a schedule
process. People with substance use book and work with your counselor.
disorders do not schedule their time. Thorough scheduling of your activities is
Scheduling your time will help you very important to treating your substance
achieve and maintain abstinence. use disorder. Remember, your rational
brain plans the schedule. If you follow
Why Is Scheduling Necessary? the schedule, you won’t use. Your
If you began your recovery in a hospital, addicted brain wants to be out of control.
you would have the structure of the If you go off the schedule, your addicted
program and the building to help you brain may be taking you back to using
stop using. As a person in outpatient drugs or drinking.
treatment, you have to build that struc-
ture to help support you as you continue Who Decides What I Schedule?
functioning in the world. Your schedule You do! You may consider suggestions
is your structure. made by your counselor or family mem-
bers, but the final decision is yours. Just
Do I Need To Write Down My be sure you do what you wrote down.
Schedule? Follow your schedule; try not to make
Absolutely. Schedules that are in your any changes.
head are too easily revised. If you write
down your schedule while your rational Most people can schedule a 24-hour
brain is in control and then follow the period and follow it. If you can, you are
schedule, you will be doing what you on your way to gaining control of your
think you should be doing instead of life. If you cannot, you may need to con-
what you feel like doing. sider a higher level of care as a start.
SCH 2 Daily/Hourly Schedule
Date:
7:00 AM How many hours will you sleep? _____
8:00 AM From _______ To _______
9:00 AM
10:00 AM Notes:
11:00 AM
12:00 PM
1:00 PM
2:00 PM
3:00 PM
4:00 PM
5:00 PM Reminders:
6:00 PM
7:00 PM
8:00 PM
9:00 PM
10:00 PM
11:00 PM
CAL 1 Marking Progress
It is useful for both you and your counselor to know where you are in the recovery
process at all times. Marking a calendar as you go helps in several ways:
l It’s a reminder of how far you’ve come in your recovery.
l A feeling of pride often results from seeing the number of days you
have been abstinent.
l Recovery can seem very long unless you can measure your
progress in short units of time.
Make a mark to record on the calendar pages every day of abstinence you achieve.
You may decide to continue the exercise following the program.
If you record your abstinent days regularly, this simple procedure will help you and
your counselor see your progress.
CAL 2 Calendar
Month:
SUNDAY MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY

ERS 1A
Trigger
Triggers Use
Thought
Craving
Triggers are people, places, objects, feelings, and times that
cause cravings. For example, if every Friday night someone cashes a paycheck, goes
out with friends, and uses stimulants, the triggers might be
l Friday night l After work l Money
l Friends who use l A bar or club
Your brain associates the triggers with substance use. As a result of constant trigger-
ing and using, one trigger can cause you to move toward substance use. The
trigger–thought–craving–use cycle feels overwhelming.
Stopping the craving process is an important part of treatment. The best way to do
that is to do the following:
1. Identify triggers.
2. Prevent exposure to triggers whenever possible (for example,

do not handle large amounts of cash).
3. Cope with triggers differently than in the past (for example, schedule
exercise and a 12-Step or mutual-help meeting for Friday nights).
Remember, triggers affect your brain and cause cravings even though you have decid-
ed to stop substance use. Your intentions to stop must translate into behavior
changes, which keep you away from possible triggers.
What are some of the strongest triggers for you?
What particular triggers might be a problem in the near future?

ERS 1B Trigger–Thought–Craving–Use
The Losing Argument

If you decide to stop drinking or using but at some point end up moving toward using
substances, your brain has given you permission by using a process called relapse
justification. Thoughts about using start an argument inside your head—your rational
self versus your substance-dependent self. You feel as though you are in a fight, and
you must come up with many reasons to stay abstinent. Your mind is looking for an
excuse to use again. You are looking for a relapse justification. The argument inside
you is part of a series of events leading to substance use. How often in the past has
your substance dependence lost this argument?
Thoughts Become Cravings

Craving does not always occur in a straightforward, easily recognized form. Often the
thought of using passes through your head with little or no effect. But it’s important to
identify these thoughts and try to eliminate them. It takes effort to identify and stop a
thought. However, allowing yourself to continue thinking about substance use is choosing
to relapse. The further the thoughts are allowed to go, the more likely you are to relapse.
The “Automatic” Process

During addiction, triggers, thoughts, cravings, and use seem to run together. However,
the usual sequence goes like this:
TRIGGER[ THOUGHT[ CRAVING[ USE
Thought Stopping
The only way to ensure that a thought won’t lead to a relapse is to stop the thought
before it leads to craving. Stopping the thought when it first begins prevents it from
building into an overpowering craving. It is important to do it as soon as you realize
you are thinking about using.
ERS 1C Thought-Stopping
Techniques
A New Sequence
To start recovery, it is necessary to interrupt the trigger–thought–craving–use
sequence. Thought stopping provides a tool for disrupting the process.
Thought-
Stopping
Techniques
Trigger Thought
Continued
Thoughts Cravings Use
This process is not automatic. You make a choice either to continue thinking about
using (and start on the path toward relapse) or to stop those thoughts.
Thought-Stopping Techniques
Try the techniques described below, and use those that work best for you:
Visualization. Imagine a scene in which you deny the power of

thoughts of use. For example, picture a switch or a lever in your mind.
Imagine yourself actually moving it from ON to OFF to stop the
using thoughts. Have another picture ready to think about in place
of those thoughts.
1 of 2
ERS 1C Thought-Stopping
Techniques
Snapping. Wear a rubber-
band loosely on your wrist. Each
time you become aware of thoughts of using,
snap the rubberband and say, “No!” to the
thoughts as you make yourself think about another
subject. Have a subject ready that is meaningful
and interesting to you.
Relaxation. Feelings of hollowness, heaviness, and cramping in the stomach are

cravings. These often can be relieved by breathing in deeply (filling lungs with air)
and breathing out slowly. Do this three times. You should be able to feel the tightness
leaving your body. Repeat this whenever the feeling returns.
Call someone. Talking to another person provides an outlet for your feelings and
allows you to hear your thinking process. Have phone numbers of supportive,
available people with you always, so you can use them when you need them.
ALLOWING THE THOUGHTS TO

DEVELOP INTO CRAVINGS IS
MAKING A CHOICE TO REMAIN
DEPENDENT ON SUBSTANCES.
2 of 2
ERS 2A External Trigger
Questionnaire
Place a checkmark next to activities, situations, or settings in which you frequently used
substances; place a zero next to activities, situations, or settings in which you never
have used substances.
c Home alone c During a date c Before going out to
c Home with friends c Before sexual activities dinner
c Friend’s home c During sexual activities c Before breakfast
c Parties c After sexual activities c At lunch break
c Sporting events c Before work c While at dinner
c Movies c When carrying money c After work
c Bars/clubs c After going past c After passing a
dealer’s residence particular street or exit
c Beach
c Driving c School
c Concerts
c Liquor store c The park
c With friends who
use drugs c During work c In the neighborhood
c When gaining weight c Talking on the phone c Weekends
c Vacations/holidays c Recovery groups c With family members
c When it’s raining c After payday c When in pain
c Before a date
List any other activities, situations, or settings where you frequently

have used.
List activities, situations, or settings in which you would not use.
List people you could be with and not use.

ERS 2B External Trigger Chart
Name: __________________________ Date:_________
Instructions: List people, places, objects, or situations below

according to their degree of association with substance use.
0% 100%
Chance of Using Chance of Using
Never Use Almost Never Use Almost Always Use Always Use
These situations These situations These situations Involvement in

are “safe.” are low risk, but are high risk. these situations is
caution is needed. Staying in these deciding to stay
situations is addicted. Avoid
extremely totally.
dangerous.
ERS 3A Internal Trigger
Questionnaire
During recovery certain feelings or emotions often trigger the brain to think about
using substances. Read the following list of feelings and emotions, and place a check-
mark next to those that might trigger thoughts of using for you. Place a zero next to
those that are not connected with using.
c Afraid c Criticized c Excited c Aroused

c Frustrated c Inadequate c Jealous c Revengeful
c Neglected c Pressured c Bored c Worried
c Angry c Depressed c Exhausted c Grieving
c Guilty c Insecure c Lonely c Resentful
c Nervous c Relaxed c Envious c Overwhelmed
c Confident c Embarrassed c Deprived c Misunderstood
c Happy c Irritated c Humiliated c Paranoid
c Passionate c Sad c Anxious c Hungry
What emotional states that are not listed above have triggered you to
use substances?
Was your use in the weeks before entering treatment

_____ Tied primarily to emotional conditions?
_____ Routine and automatic without much emotional triggering?
Were there times in the recent past when you were not using and a
specific change in your mood clearly resulted in your wanting to use
(for example, you got in a fight with someone and wanted to use in
response to getting angry)? Yes _____ No _____ If yes, describe:
ERS 3B Internal Trigger Chart
Name: __________________________ Date:_________
Instructions: List emotional states below according to their degree

of association with substance use.
0% 100%
Chance of Using Chance of Using
Never Use Almost Never Use Almost Always Use Always Use
These emotions are These emotions are These emotions are Persisting in
“safe.” low risk, but caution high risk. these emotions is
is needed. deciding to stay
addicted. Avoid
totally.
ERS 4A 12-Step
Introduction
Meetings
What Is a 12-Step Program?
In the 1930s, Alcoholics Anonymous (AA) was founded by
two men who could not cope with their own alcoholism through psychiatry or medicine.
They found a number of specific principles helped people overcome their alcohol
dependence. They formed AA to introduce people who were dependent on alcohol to
these self-help principles. The AA concepts have been adapted to stimulant and other
drug addictions (for example, Crystal Meth Anonymous, Narcotics Anonymous [NA], and
Cocaine Anonymous) and to compulsive behaviors such as gambling and overeating.
People dependent on drugs or alcohol have found that others who also are dependent
can provide enormous support and help to one another. For this reason, these groups
are called fellowships, where participants show concern and support for one another
through sharing and understanding.
Do I Need To Attend 12-Step Meetings?

If treatment in this program is going to work for you, it is essential to establish a network
of support for your recovery. Attending treatment sessions without going to 12-Step
meetings may produce a temporary effect. But without involvement in self-help pro-
grams, it is very unlikely that you will successfully recover. Clients in these programs
should attend three 12-Step meetings per week during their treatment involvement.
Many successfully abstinent people go to 90 meetings in 90 days. The more you
participate in treatment and 12-Step meetings, the greater your chance for recovery.
Are All Meetings the Same?

No. There are different types of meetings:
l Speaker meetings feature a person in recovery telling his or her

story of drug and alcohol use and recovery.
1 of 5
ERS 4A 12-Step
Introduction
l Topic meetings have a discussion on a specific
topic such as fellowship, honesty, acceptance, or
patience. Everyone is given a chance to talk, but no one is forced.
l Step/Tradition meetings are special meetings where the 12 Steps

and 12 Traditions are discussed.
l Book study meetings focus on reading a chapter from the main text
of the 12-Step group. (For AA, this is the Big Book; for NA, the Basic
Text.) Book study meetings often focus on someone’s experience or
a recovery-related topic.
l Depending on where you live, there may be language-specific

meetings, gender-specific meetings, open meetings, meetings
based on participants’ sexual orientation, and meetings for people
who also have a mental disorder (“double trouble” Dual Recovery
Anonymous meetings).
Are the 12-Step Programs Religious?

No. None of the 12-Step programs are religious, but spiritual growth is considered a
part of recovery. Spiritual choices are very personal and individual. Each person
decides for himself or herself what the term “higher power” means. Both nonreligious
and religious people can find value and support in 12-Step programs.
How Do I Find a Meeting?

You can call directory assistance or check the phonebook for Alcoholics Anonymous,
Cocaine Anonymous, or Narcotics Anonymous. Listings for Crystal Meth Anonymous
meetings can be found at www.crystalmeth.org. You can call the numbers available
from the Web site and speak to someone who can tell you when and where meetings
are scheduled. At meetings, directories are available that list meetings by city, street
address, and meeting time and include information about the meeting (for example,
2 of 5
ERS 4A 12-Step
Introduction
speaker, step study, nonsmoking, men’s, or women’s). Another
way to find a good meeting is to ask someone who goes to 12-Step meetings.
Sponsors
The first few weeks and months of recovery are frustrating. Many things happen that
are confusing and frightening. During this difficult period, there are many times when
people in recovery need to talk about problems and fears. A sponsor helps guide a
newcomer through this process.
What Do Sponsors Do?

l Sponsors help the newcomer by answering questions and
explaining the 12-Step recovery process.
l Sponsors agree to be available to listen to their sponsorees’

difficulties and frustrations and to share their insights and solutions.
l Sponsors provide guidance and help address problems their

sponsorees are having. This advice comes from their personal
experiences with long-term abstinence.
l Sponsors are people with whom addiction-related secrets and guilt

feelings can be shared easily. They agree to keep these secrets
confidential and to protect the newcomer’s anonymity.
l Sponsors warn their sponsorees when they get off the path of
recovery. Sponsors often are the first people to know when their
sponsorees experience a slip or relapse. So, sponsors often push
their sponsorees to attend more meetings or get help for problems.
l Sponsors help their sponsorees work through the 12 Steps.
3 of 5
ERS 4A 12-Step
Introduction
How Do I Pick a Sponsor?
The process of choosing a sponsor is easy. The newcomer simply asks someone to
be his or her sponsor. But you need to think carefully about whom you will ask to
sponsor you. Most people select a sponsor who seems to be living a healthy and
responsible life, the kind of life a person in recovery would want to lead.
Some general guidelines for selecting a sponsor include the following:
l A sponsor should have several years of abstinence from all

mood-altering drugs.
l A sponsor should have a healthful lifestyle and not be struggling

with major problems or addiction.
l A sponsor should be an active and regular participant in 12-Step

meetings. Also, a sponsor should be someone who actively “works”
the 12 Steps.
l A sponsor should be someone to whom you can relate. You may

not always agree with your sponsor, but you need to be able to
respect your sponsor.
l A sponsor should be someone you would not become romantically

interested in.
Alternatives to 12-Step Programs

There are alternatives to 12-Step groups, many of which are not based on the concept
of a higher power. Although the philosophies of these groups differ, most offer a
mutual-help approach that focuses on personal responsibility, personal empowerment,
and strength through an abstinent social network. Here are a few notable alternatives
to 12-Step groups:
4 of 5
ERS 4A 12-Step
Introduction
l Women for Sobriety (www.womenforsobriety.org)
helps women overcome alcohol dependence through
emotional and spiritual growth.
l Jewish Alcoholics, Chemically Dependent Persons and Significant

Others (JACS) (www.jacsweb.org) helps people explore recovery in
a nurturing Jewish environment.
l Self-Management and Recovery Training (SMART)

(www.smartrecovery.org) is a cognitive–behavioral group approach
that focuses on self-reliance, problemsolving, coping strategies, and
a balanced lifestyle.
l Secular Organizations for Sobriety (www.secularhumanism.org)

maintains that sobriety is a separate issue from religion or spirituality
and credits the individual for achieving and maintaining sobriety.
l Community-based spiritual fellowships, which take place in churches,

synagogues, mosques, temples, and other spiritually focused settings,
often help people clarify their values and change their lives.
Questions To Consider
l Have you ever been to a 12-Step meeting? If so, what was your
experience?
l Have you attended any other types of recovery meetings (such as

those listed above)?
l Do you plan to attend any 12-Step meetings? Where? When?
l How might you make use of 12-Step meetings to stop using?
l Are there alternatives to 12-Step meetings that you might consider

attending?
5 of 5
ERS 4B The Serenity Prayer and the
12 Steps of Alcoholics
Anonymous
The Serenity Prayer

God grant me the serenity to accept the things I cannot change, the courage to
change the things I can, and the wisdom to know the difference.
The 12 Steps of Alcoholics Anonymous*

1 We admitted that we were powerless 8 Made a list of all persons we had
over alcohol—that our lives had become harmed and became willing to make
unmanageable. amends to them all.
2 Came to believe that a Power greater 9 Made direct amends to such people
than ourselves could restore us to sanity. wherever possible, except when to do so
would injure them or others.
3 Made a decision to turn our will and
our lives over to the care of God as we 10 Continued to take personal inventory,
understood Him. and when we were wrong, promptly
admitted it.
4 Made a searching and fearless moral
inventory of ourselves. 11 Sought through prayer and medita-
tion to improve our conscious contact
5 Admitted to God, to ourselves, and to
with God as we understood Him, praying
another human being the exact nature of
only for knowledge of His will for us and
our wrongs.
the power to carry that out.
6 Were entirely ready to have God 12 Having had a spiritual awakening as
remove all these defects of character.
a result of the steps, we tried to carry
7 Humbly asked Him to remove our this message to alcoholics and to prac-
shortcomings. tice these principles in all our affairs.
*The Twelve Steps are reprinted with permission of Alcoholics Anonymous World Services, Inc. (A.A.W.S.). Permission to reprint the Twelve Steps does not
mean that A.A.W.S. has reviewed or approved the contents of this publication, or that A.A.W.S. necessarily agrees with the views expressed herein. A.A. is a
program of recovery from alcoholism only—use of the Twelve Steps in connection with programs and activities which are patterned after A.A., but which address
other problems, or in any other non-A.A. context, does not imply otherwise.
ERS 5 Roadmap for
Recovery
Recovery from a substance use disorder is not a
mysterious process. After the use of substances
is stopped, the brain goes through a biological
readjustment. This readjustment process is
essentially a “healing” of the chemical changes
that were produced in the brain by substance use. It is important for people in the
beginning stages of recovery to understand why they may experience some physical
and emotional difficulties. The durations of the stages listed below are a rough guide
of recovery, not a schedule. The length of stages will vary from person to person. The
substance used will affect the client’s progress through the stages, too. Clients who
had been using methamphetamine will tend to spend more time in each stage than
clients who were using cocaine or other stimulants.
The Stages
Withdrawal Stage (1 to 2 weeks)
During the first days after substance use is stopped, some people experience difficult
symptoms. The extent of the symptoms often is related to the amount, frequency, and
type of their previous substance use.
For people who use stimulants, withdrawal can be accompanied by drug craving,
depression, low energy, difficulty sleeping or excessive sleep, increased appetite, and
difficulty concentrating. Although people who use stimulants do not experience the
same degree of physical symptoms as do people who use alcohol, the psychological
symptoms of craving and depression can be quite severe. Clients may have trouble
coping with stress and may be irritable.
1 of 3
ERS 5 Roadmap for
Recovery
People who drank alcohol in large amounts may have the most
severe symptoms. The symptoms can include nausea, low
energy, anxiety, shakiness, depression, intense emotions, insomnia, irritability, difficulty
concentrating, and memory problems. These symptoms typically last 3 to 5 days but can
last up to several weeks. Some people must be hospitalized to detox safely.
For people who used opioids or prescription drugs, the 7- to 10-day withdrawal period
(or longer for people who use benzodiazepines) can be physically uncomfortable and
may require hospitalization and medication. It is essential to have a physician closely
monitor withdrawal in people dependent on these substances. Along with the physical
discomfort, many people experience nervousness, trouble sleeping, depression, and
difficulty concentrating. Successfully completing withdrawal from these substances is a
major achievement in early recovery.
Early Abstinence (4 weeks; follows Withdrawal)

For people who used stimulants, this 4-week period is called the Honeymoon. Most
people feel quite good during this period and often feel “cured.” As a result, clients
may want to drop out of treatment or stop attending 12-Step meetings during the
Honeymoon period. Early abstinence should be used as an opportunity to establish a
good foundation for recovery. If clients can direct the energy, enthusiasm, and opti-
mism felt during this period into recovery activities, they can lay the foundation for
future success.
For people who used alcohol, this 4-week period is marked by the brain’s recovery.
Although the physical withdrawal symptoms have ended, clients still are getting used
to the absence of substances. Thinking may be unclear, concentration may be poor,
nervousness and anxiety may be troubling, sleep is often irregular, and, in many ways,
life feels too intense.
2 of 3
ERS 5 Roadmap for
Recovery
For those who used opioids or prescription drugs, there is
essentially a gradual normalization during this period. In
many ways the process is similar to the alcohol recovery timetable. Slow, gradual
improvement in symptoms is evidence that the recovery is progressing.
Protracted Abstinence (3.5 months; follows Early Abstinence)

From 6 weeks to 5 months after clients stop using, they may experience a variety of
annoying and troublesome symptoms. These symptoms—difficulties with thoughts and
feelings—are caused by the continuing healing process in the brain. This period is
called the Wall. It is important for clients to be aware that some of the feelings during
this period are the result of changes in brain chemistry. If clients remain abstinent, the
feelings will pass. The most common symptoms are depression, irritability, difficulty
concentrating, low energy, and a general lack of enthusiasm. Clients also may experi-
ence strong cravings during protracted abstinence. Relapse risk goes up during this
period. Clients must stay focused on remaining abstinent one day at a time. Exercise
helps tremendously during this period. For most clients, completing this phase in
recovery is a major achievement.
Readjustment (2 months; follows Protracted Abstinence)

After 5 months, the brain has recovered substantially. Now, the client’s main task is
developing a life that has fulfilling activities that support continued recovery. Although
a difficult part of recovery is over, hard work is needed to improve the quality of life.
Because cravings occur less often and feel less intense 6 months into recovery,
clients may be less aware of relapse risk and put themselves in high-risk situations
and increase their relapse risk.
3 of 3
ERS 6A Five Common Challenges
in Early Recovery
Everyone who attempts to stop using substances runs into situations
that make it difficult to maintain abstinence. Listed below are five of
the most common situations that are encountered during the first few weeks of treatment.
Next to these problems are some suggested alternatives for handling these situations.
Challenges New Approaches

Friends and l Try to make new friends at 12-Step or mutual-help
associates meetings.
who use: You want to l Participate in new activities or hobbies that will
continue associations increase your chances of meeting abstinent people.
with old friends or
l Plan activities with abstinent friends or family members.
friends who use.
Anger, l Remind yourself that recovery involves a healing of

irritability: brain chemistry. Strong, unpredictable emotions are
Small events can cre- a natural part of recovery.
ate feelings of anger l Engage in exercise.
that seem to preoccu-
l Talk to a counselor or a supportive friend.
py your thoughts and
can lead to relapse.
Substances l Get rid of all drugs and alcohol.

in the home: l Ask others to refrain from using and drinking at home.
You have decided to
l If you continue to have a problem, think about
stop using, but others
moving out for a while.
in your house may still
be using.
1 of 2
ERS 6A Five Common Challenges
in Early Recovery
Challenges New Approaches
Boredom, l Put new activities in your schedule.
loneliness: l Go back to activities you enjoyed before your
Stopping substance use addiction took over.
often means that activities
l Develop new friends at 12-Step or mutual-help
you did for fun and the
meetings.
people with whom you did
them must be avoided.
Special l Have a plan for answering questions about not

occasions: using substances.
Parties, dinners, business l Start your own abstinent celebrations and traditions.
meetings, and holidays
l Have your own transportation to and from events.
without substance use
can be difficult. l Leave if you get uncomfortable or start feeling
deprived.
Are some of these issues likely to be problems for you in the next few
weeks? Which ones?
How will you handle them?
2 of 2
ERS 6B Alcohol Arguments
Have you been able to stop using alcohol completely? At about 6 weeks into the
recovery process, many people return to alcohol use. Has your addicted brain played
with the idea? These are some of the most common arguments against stopping the
use of alcohol and answers to the arguments.
I came here to stop using speed, not to stop drinking. Part of stopping
methamphetamine use is stopping all substance use, including alcohol use.
I’ve had drinks and not used, so it doesn’t make any difference. Drinking
over time greatly increases the risk of relapse. A single drink does not necessarily
cause relapse anymore than a single cigarette causes lung cancer. However, with
continued drinking, the risks of relapse greatly increase.
Drinking actually helps. When I have a craving, a drink calms me down,

and the craving goes away. Alcohol interferes with the brain’s chemical healing
process. Continued alcohol use eventually intensifies cravings, even if one drink
seems to reduce cravings.
I’m not an alcoholic, so why do I need to stop drinking. If you’re not an

alcoholic, you should have no problem stopping alcohol use. If you can’t stop, maybe
alcohol is more of a problem than you realize.
I’m never going to use drugs again, but I’m not sure I’ll never drink again.
Make a 6-month commitment to total abstinence. Give yourself the chance to make
a decision about alcohol with a drug-free brain. If you reject alcohol abstinence
because “forever” scares you, then you’re justifying drinking now and risking relapse
to substance use.
Has your addicted brain presented you with other justifications? If so,
what are they?
How are you planning to handle alcohol use in the future?

ERS 7A Thoughts, Emotions, and
Behavior
Habitual substance use changes the way people think, how they feel, and how they
behave. How do these changes affect the recovery process?
Thoughts
Thoughts happen in the rational part of the brain. They are like pictures on the TV
screen of the mind. Thoughts can be controlled. As you become aware of your thoughts,
you can learn to change channels in your brain. Learning to turn off thoughts of sub-
stance use is a very important part of the recovery process. It is not easy to become
aware of your thinking and to learn to control the process. With practice it gets easier.
Emotions
Emotions are feelings. Happiness, sadness, anger, and fear are some basic emotions.
Feelings are the mind’s response to things that happen to you. Feelings cannot be con-
trolled; they are neither good nor bad. It is important to be aware of your feelings. Talking
to family members, friends, or a counselor can help you recognize how you feel. People
normally feel a range of emotions. Drugs can change your emotions by changing the
way your brain works. During recovery, emotions are often still mixed up. Sometimes
you feel irritated for no reason or great even though nothing wonderful has happened.
You cannot control or choose your feelings, but you can control what you do about them.
Behavior
What you do is behavior. Work is behavior. Play is behavior. Going to treatment is
behavior, and substance use is behavior. Behavior can result from an emotion, from a
thought, or from a combination of both. Repeated use of a substance changes your
thoughts and pushes your emotions toward substance use. This powerful, automatic
process has to be brought back under control for recovery to occur. Structuring time,
attending 12-Step or mutual-help meetings, and engaging in new activities are all
ways of regaining control. The goal in recovery is to learn to combine your thinking
and feeling self and behave in ways that are best for you and your life.
ERS 7B Addictive Behavior
People who abuse substances often feel that their lives are out of control. Maintaining
control becomes harder and harder the longer they have been abusing substances.
People do desperate things to continue to appear normal. These desperate behaviors
are called addictive behaviors—behaviors related to substance use. Sometimes these
addictive behaviors occur only when people are using or moving toward using.
Recognize when you begin to engage in these behaviors. That’s when you know to
start fighting extra hard to move away from relapse.
Which of these behaviors do you think are related to your drug or

alcohol use?
c Lying c Behaving compulsively (for
example, too much eating,
c Stealing working, sex)
c Being irresponsible (for exam- c Changing work habits (for exam-
ple, not meeting family or work ple, working more, less, not at
commitments) all, new job, change in hours)
c Being unreliable (for example, c Losing interest in things (for
being late for appointments, example, recreational activities,
breaking promises) family life)
c Being careless about health and c Isolating (staying by yourself
grooming (for example, wearing much of the time)
“using” clothes, avoiding exer-
cise, eating poorly, having a c Missing or being late for
messy appearance) treatment
c Getting sloppy in housekeeping c Using other drugs or alcohol
c Behaving impulsively (without c Stopping prescribed medica-
thinking) tion (for example, disulfiram,
naltrexone)
ERS 8 12-Step Sayings
The program of Alcoholics Anonymous has developed some short sayings that help
people in their day-to-day efforts at staying sober. These concepts are often useful
tools in learning how to establish sobriety.
One day at a time. This is a key concept in staying abstinent. Don’t obsess about
staying abstinent forever. Just focus on today.
Turn it over. Sometimes people with addictions jeopardize their recovery by tackling
problems that cannot be solved. Finding a way to let go of issues so that you can
focus on staying abstinent is a very important skill.
Keep it simple. Learning to stay abstinent can get complicated and seem over-
whelming if you let it. In fact, there are some simple concepts involved. Don’t make
this process difficult: keep it simple.
Take what you need and leave the rest. Not everyone benefits from every part
of 12-Step meetings. It is not a perfect program. However, if you focus on the parts you
find useful, rather than the ones that bother you, the program has something for you.
Bring your body, the mind will follow. The most important aspect of 12-Step
programs is attending the meetings. It takes a while to feel completely comfortable. Try
different meetings, try to meet people, and read the materials. Just go and keep going.
HALT
This acronym is familiar to people in the 12-Step programs. It is a shorthand way of
reminding people in recovery that they are especially vulnerable to relapse when they
are too hungry, angry, lonely, or tired.
Hungry: When people are using, they often ignore their nutritional needs. People in
recovery need to relearn the importance of eating regularly. Being hungry can cause
changes in body chemistry that make people less able to control themselves or avoid
cravings. Often the person feels anxious and upset but doesn’t associate the feelings
with hunger. Eating regularly increases emotional stability.
1 of 2
ERS 8 12-Step Sayings
Angry: This emotional state is probably the most common cause of relapse to drug
use. Learning to cope with anger in a healthy way is difficult for many people. It is
not healthy to act in anger without thinking about the consequences. Nor is it healthy
to hold anger in and try to pretend it doesn’t exist. Talking about anger-producing
situations and how to handle them is an important part of recovery.
Lonely: Recovery is often a lonely process. People lose relationships because of

their substance use. As part of staying abstinent, people in recovery may have to give
up friends who still use. The feelings of loneliness are real and painful. They make
people more vulnerable to relapse.
Tired: Sleep disorders are often a part of early recovery. People in recovery frequently
have to give up chemical aids to sleep that they used in the past. Being tired is often
a trigger for relapse. Feeling exhausted and low on energy leaves people vulnerable
and unable to function in a healthy way.
How often do you find yourself in one or more of these emotional states?
What could you do differently to avoid being so vulnerable?
2 of 2
V. Relapse Prevention Group
Introduction for discussion by the group for 45 minutes.
Over the first hour of the meeting, the counselor
Goals of Relapse Prevention Group ensures that all the important aspects of the
topic are covered and that premature digres-
n Allow clients to interact with other people
sions from the main topic are avoided. Clients
in recovery.
with concerns or questions unrelated to the
n Alert clients to the pitfalls of recovery and topic can be assured that the final 30 minutes
precursors of relapse. of the group meeting will be devoted to issues
that individual clients are struggling with. The
n Give clients the strategies and tools to
counselor wraps up the discussion period with
use in sustaining their recovery.
a reiteration of the session topic and the impor-
n Allow group members to benefit from the tant issues relevant to it.
long-term sobriety experience of the
recovering co-leader. Open Discussion
n Allow the counselor to witness the person- During the last 30 minutes of each group ses-
al interactions of clients. sion, the counselor asks clients whether they
have had any recent problems or whether they
n Allow clients to benefit from participating wish to bring up any matters. Individual clients,
in a long-term group experience. particularly those who have been having prob-
lems or those who have not participated in the
Session Format and Counseling group session, should be encouraged to partici-
Approach pate. General questions that usually evoke a
response include the following:
New Member Introductions
Each 90-minute Relapse Prevention (RP) group n How are things going?
meeting begins with new members introducing
themselves and giving a brief description of n Are there any new developments with the
their substance use history. This description problem you brought up last time?
should not be detailed or graphic, nor should n Have you had any cravings?
it be a litany of “war stories.” New members
provide basic information such as type of sub- n If so, how did you handle them?
stances used and their reasons for entering n How are you planning to stay abstinent
treatment. Clients who ramble or provide this week?
unnecessary substance use details should be
prompted gently to finish their introduction. End of Session
The counselor ties up loose ends, summarizes
Topic Presentation and Discussion the discussion, and acknowledges any unre-
Following the introductions and during the solved issues. Discussion of these issues can be
first 15 minutes of the session, the counselor carried over to the next meeting. The counselor
presents a specific topic in a casual, didactic can ask clients who during the session men-
manner. The counselor then opens up the topic tioned cravings or who appear troubled, angry, or
85
depressed to stay afterward to talk briefly and to Balancing Group Cohesion With Excessive
schedule them for individual sessions as soon as Interdependence
possible. All sessions should end on a positive Along with 12-Step or other mutual-help meetings,
note and with a reminder that what is said in the RP group is the most consistent element of
group stays in group and a commitment by Matrix treatment. Each of the initial 16 weeks of
clients to attend the next RP group meeting. treatment features an RP group meeting on
Monday and Friday. The frequency and intensity
Special Considerations of these group meetings foster interdependence
Clients who are quiet and uncommunicative among clients. The resulting bonding and cohe-
may be concealing issues that should be elicited sion can support and motivate clients and help
and discussed. sustain treatment involvement. However, bal-
ancing clients’ responsibility to their fellow group
The group provides an opportunity for clients to members with the need to take charge of their
solicit input from and give encouragement to own recovery can be tricky. The counselor
other group members. The counselor should needs to ensure that clients gain support and
ask for comments from all clients on the issue encouragement from the group without develop-
being discussed, especially if particular group ing exclusive dependence on the group for their
members have coped with the issue. For abstinence and recovery. Each client should
example, clients who have moved beyond the view recovery as a personal achievement that
protracted abstinence period could be asked to has been supported and encouraged by other
describe how they handled problems they group members. If several group members
encountered during that time. The counselor experience relapse, the independence of each
should not, however, relinquish control of the client’s personal recovery can help prevent
group or promote directionless crosstalk about relapse contagion, in which relapse seems to
how each person feels about what the others spread from member to member of a group like
have said. The counselor must maintain the an infectious disease.
group’s focus and direction and be ready to redi-
rect discussions that are moving into redundan- The camaraderie and cohesion of an RP group
cy, irrelevance, inappropriateness, or volatility. are extremely valuable to the treatment
process. However, clients should be cautioned
The recovering co-leader can be a positive role against treatment program romances and out-
model, reinforce suggestions, and share advice side involvement with other group members
from experiences. Rather than lecture or talk (e.g., entering into a business relationship).
down to the group, the recovering co-leader When they start treatment, clients must sign an
should speak in the first person about his or her agreement to avoid intense relationships out-
experiences. The recovering co-leader may be side group. The counselor should remind clients
effective in instances where clients are resistant of this agreement and discuss with them the
to the counselor’s input. In such cases, the rationale for prohibiting intense personal
co-leader’s discussion of what worked for involvement between group members. If two
him or her may be offered in a “for what it’s clients are becoming inappropriately involved,
worth” manner, with the aim of providing a the counselor should meet with them briefly
strategy that worked for one person and the after group to remind them that such relation-
encouragement that comes with knowing that ships are discouraged and to discuss appropriate
others have succeeded. ways that the clients can handle the situation.
86
In the first few months of recovery, the main der of the group; this client’s concerns should be
forums for social support in the context of the discussed individually after the group meeting.
Matrix method are the RP group and outside
spiritual and mutual-help support groups.
Behavior: Making threatening, insulting, or
Clients should be encouraged to find a long-
personally directed remarks; behaving in a
term support system through their involvement
manner obviously indicative of intoxication.
in these groups. By attending meetings and
socializing with 12-Step members, recovering Intervention: Take the client out of the
clients will be able to find a sponsor to help group, and let the recovering co-leader lead the
guide their recovery as well as make recovering group. Have a brief individual session with the
friends with whom to pursue substance-free difficult client, or have another counselor inter-
activities. To build a vital support system that vene. Be sure that the client has calmed down
will help them avoid relapse, clients in early before leaving him or her. Arrange for trans-
recovery need to expand their network of sup- portation home, if the client cannot drive or get
port beyond the people they meet in treatment home safely.
to include people with longer term abstinence.
Behavior: Having a general lack of commit-
Handling Troublesome Client Behaviors ment to treatment, as evidenced by poor atten-
At times, the counselor may need to intervene dance, resistance to treatment intervention,
assertively in response to specific types of client disruptive behavior, or repeated relapses.
behavior in the group. This intervention may Intervention: Reassess and adjust the
consist of quieting a client, limiting a client’s treatment plan in an individual or conjoint session
involvement in the group, or removing a client with the uncommitted client. If the client agrees
from the group. Below are some strategies for not to show up intoxicated or engage in inappro-
handling troublesome client behaviors. priate behavior, he or she can be allowed to
attend the meeting but should be asked to listen
Behavior: Occupying too much session time and not to speak. The client should be given
with an issue that has been addressed. some discussion time at the end of this session,
Intervention: Politely suggest that it is contingent on appropriate behavior.
time to allow others to discuss their issues and
move on. Addressing Drug Dreams During Recovery
It is not unusual for clients in recovery to have
Behavior: Arguing in favor of behavior that is frequent and intense dreams about substance
counter to recovery (e.g., using, dropping out of use. The counselor should reassure clients that
group, using self-control instead of avoiding trig- these dreams—which can be frightening—are a
gers) after receiving repeated feedback. normal part of recovery. Stimulant use interferes
with normal sleep patterns; when people stop
Intervention: Point out the futility of these
using substances, vivid dreams are part of the
sorts of approaches in light of the realities of
brain’s recovery process. Intense dreams of
addiction and the experience of others. If the
substance use can produce feelings that persist
client continues along the same lines, ask him
into the waking day and can act as triggers for
or her to listen and not to speak for the remain-
use. Clients who have detailed dreams about
87
using should be alert to the added risk of Adapting Client Handouts

relapse during the ensuing day. The counselor Client handouts are written in simpler language
should encourage clients to express their con- than the session descriptions for counselors.
cerns about drug dreams during the open dis- The client materials should be understandable
cussion period of RP sessions. However, clients for someone with an eighth grade reading level.
should be discouraged from describing their Difficult words (e.g., abstinence, justification)
dreams of using in detail because they may act are occasionally used. Counselors should be
as triggers for other clients. If, during a group prepared to help clients who struggle with the
session, a client mentions having dreamed material. Counselors should be aware that
about using substances, the counselor should handouts will need to be adapted for clients
have clients look at handout RP 33—Drug with reading difficulties.
Dreams During Recovery and go over it with
them. The handout discusses how drug dreams Session Descriptions
affect early (0–6 weeks), middle (7–16 weeks),
Pages 92 through 165 provide structured
and late (17–24 weeks) recovery and provides
guidance to the counselor for organizing and
some suggestions to help clients address the
conducting the RP group sessions. Figure V-1
issue of drug dreams. This handout also can be
provides an overview of the RP sessions.
used to supplement RP sessions that focus on
triggers and cravings (e.g., sessions 3, 9, 11,
Following the presentation of the 32 RP sessions
13, 16, 18, and 21).
are descriptions of 3 elective sessions that can
be used as substitute sessions whenever the
Rational Brain Versus Addicted Brain counselor deems appropriate. For example,
The RP group session descriptions use the Elective Session B addresses the difficulties
metaphorical struggle between a client’s rational clients may face around major holidays, such as
brain and addicted brain as a way to talk about Christmas or the Fourth of July. The counselor
recovery. The terms rational brain and addicted may wish to substitute this session for 1 of the
brain do not correspond to physiological regions 32 regular sessions if a holiday is approaching.
of the brain, but they give clients a way to con- The handouts indicated in all the RP session
ceptualize the struggle between the desire to descriptions are provided after the session
stay committed to recovery and the desire to descriptions for the counselor’s use and are
begin using stimulants again. duplicated in the Client’s Handbook.
88
Figure V-1. Relapse Prevention Sessions Overview

Session
Topic Content Pages
Number
Clients learn how alcohol can jeopardize recovery. Clients discuss
1 Alcohol
and plan for situations in which they are likely to drink.
92–93
Clients learn that boredom in recovery is to be expected and will

2 Boredom diminish over time. Clients discuss activities to help alleviate 94–95
boredom.
Avoiding Re- Clients learn about relapse drift and discuss things that anchor
3 lapse Drift their recovery.
96–97
Work and Clients learn how their work life affects their recovery and
4 Recovery explore ways to balance work and recovery.
98–99
Guilt and Clients learn to distinguish between guilt and shame and
5 Shame discuss ways to cope with each.
100–101
Clients learn that idle time can be a trigger and discuss how
6 Staying Busy
scheduling activities can help them avoid relapse.
102–103
Clients learn that the same motivation that brought them to

Motivation
7 for Recovery
treatment may not sustain them. Clients discuss new motiva- 104–105
tions and strategies for staying abstinent.
Clients learn that although truthfulness is not always easy,

8 Truthfulness it is integral to successful recovery. Clients discuss the conse- 106–107
quences and benefits of always telling the truth.
Clients learn that substance use of any kind will cloud their
Total
9 Abstinence
decisionmaking and endanger recovery. Clients discuss 108–109
changes they must make to eliminate all substance use.
Clients learn that impulsive sex can be a form of dependence

Sex and
10 Recovery
and can lead to relapse. Clients discuss the ways that stable 110–111
relationships can contribute to recovery.
Anticipating
Clients learn to recognize the warning signs of relapse and
11 and Prevent-
explore strategies for avoiding relapse.
112–113
ing Relapse
Clients learn the necessity of restoring lost trust and discuss ways
12 Trust
to cope with being suspected of continued substance abuse.
114–115
Clients learn that recovery is not a test of will but of commitment

Be Smart,
13 Not Strong
and smart planning. Clients discuss the efficacy of their approach 116–117
to recovery.
89

(continued)
Session
Topic Content Pages
Number
Defining Clients explore the difference between spirituality and religion
14 Spirituality and discuss ways that spiritual beliefs can support recovery.
118–119
Managing
Life; Clients identify aspects of their life that have been neglected
15 Managing and explore ways to manage their lives responsibly.
120–121
Money
Clients learn about relapse justification. Clients discuss justifi-
Relapse
16 Justification I
cations to which they are susceptible and formulate plans to 122–123
counter them.
Taking Care Clients learn the importance of self-esteem to recovery and
17 of Yourself explore aspects of their lives that require change.
124–125
Emotional Clients learn that emotions can act as triggers and discuss
18 Triggers tools that will help them avoid dangerous emotions.
126–127
Clients learn that becoming ill can be a trigger and discuss

19 Illness
ways to keep their recovery on track when they are sick.
128–129
Recognizing Clients learn the threat that stress poses to recovery. Clients
20 Stress discuss how to identify and cope with stressful situations.
130–132
Clients learn that moving closer to relapse (e.g., to test the

Relapse
21 Justification II
strength of their recovery) is dangerous. Clients explore 133–135
strategies to resist relapse justifications.
Reducing Clients are reminded that stress can endanger their recovery
22 Stress and discuss strategies to reduce stress.
136–137
Managing Clients learn that anger can be a trigger. Clients discuss ways
23 Anger to recognize and address a buildup of anger.
138–139
Clients learn that accepting their substance use disorder is not

24 Acceptance
a sign of weakness. Clients explore strengths to rely on.
140–141
Clients learn that abstinent friends can support their recovery.

Making New
25 Friends
Clients discuss people who can serve as supportive friends and 142–143
how to meet them.
90

(continued)
Session
Topic Content Pages
Number
Repairing Clients learn the importance of making amends and discuss
26 Relationships how to address people who refuse to forgive them.
144–145
Clients learn to distinguish between things that can be changed

Serenity
27 Prayer
and those that cannot. Clients discuss things in their lives that 146–147
they will change.
Clients learn what compulsive behaviors are and how they can
Compulsive
28 Behaviors
endanger recovery. Clients discuss ways to recognize and elim- 148–149
inate compulsive behaviors.
Coping With Clients learn to recognize their emotional responses, especially

29 Feelings and signs of depression. Clients explore strategies for coping with 150–152
Depression depression.
12-Step and Clients learn how 12-Step and mutual-help programs support
30 Mutual-Help recovery. Clients explore the variety of 12-Step and mutual-help 153–155
Programs programs available.
Looking
Forward; Clients learn that boredom can be a relapse trigger. Clients dis-
31 Managing cuss ways to break the monotony of recovery.
156–157
Downtime
One Day at Clients learn to avoid feeling overwhelmed by the past and
32 a Time explore strategies for focusing on the present.
158–159
Elective Clients learn that establishing a regular pattern of self-review

Client Status
Session Review
will help support recovery. Clients discuss areas in which they 160–161
A need to improve.
Elective
Holidays and Clients learn that holidays pose risks for recovery and discuss
Session 162–163
Recovery ways to alleviate the added stress that comes with holidays.
B
Elective Clients learn how new hobbies and pursuits can help support
Recreational
Session recovery. Clients discuss old hobbies they would like to pick up 164–165
Activities
C again or new pursuits they wish to try.
91
Session 1: Alcohol
Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that alcohol is a substance whose use can jeopardize recovery.
n Help clients identify the situations in which they are most likely to drink.
n Help clients plan for those situations so they can remain abstinent.
Handout
n RP 1—Alcohol
Presentation of Topic (15 minutes)

1. Understanding the Effects of Alcohol on the Brain
Because alcohol affects the rational, reasoning part of the brain, people who are drinking are especially
ill equipped to evaluate the detriments of drinking and the benefits of quitting. Drinking also lessens
people’s inhibitions and makes them feel less self-conscious, more sociable, and more sexual. Some
clients will have to address the fact that they have used alcohol to make themselves feel comfortable
in social situations. Some clients may have to address the fact that sexuality is linked with alcohol for
them. Clients who are accustomed to consuming alcohol in social or sexual situations may find that,
for a time, these activities are uncomfortable without alcohol.
2. Being Alert for External and Internal Triggers for Drinking

Alcohol consumption is a significant and pervasive part of U.S. culture. Clients who are trying to stop
using alcohol face a difficult struggle. External triggers bombard clients; consumption of alcohol is
assumed to be the norm, especially at social functions and celebrations. It is hard for clients to go
through a typical day without coming across many reminders—both cultural and personal—of alcohol.
Advertisements, movies, and TV shows link drinking with being happy, popular, and successful.
Clients encounter colleagues, friends, and family members with whom they used to drink and pass by
bars or liquor stores that they used to frequent.
Internal triggers also pose problems for clients. Depression, anxiety, and loneliness are all characteristic
of recovery. These emotional states also are cues to drink for many people. Facing the emotional
fallout from quitting other substances, clients feel justified in turning to alcohol to “relieve” their mental
state. It is difficult for clients to realize that alcohol may be responsible for their depression or other
emotional problems.
3. Preparing for Situations Involving Alcohol

Drinking often accompanies certain activities: wine with dinner, a beer at the game, a drink after work.
Alcohol also is integral to celebrations such as parties and weddings. For some clients, alcohol seems to
be an inextricable part of these activities; they cannot conceive of enjoying certain activities without drink-
ing. Not drinking may mean that clients feel left out of the fun, less cool. It is important for clients to know
that they will have these feelings and to prepare for them. Clients should be encouraged to think about
ways of celebrating that do not involve alcohol. If they know that being around others who are drinking will
make them feel left out, clients should avoid such situations until their recovery is well underway.
92
Handout and Focused Discussion (45 minutes)

Clients should be given time to complete the handout before the discussion begins. Clients should not
be forced to comply if they find it difficult or uncomfortable to complete the handout in the group. The
handout is primarily a tool for discussion. The counselor steers clients away from reading their
responses and encourages them to converse about the issues the handout raises. The counselor
ensures that all clients have an opportunity to participate.
n Go over handout RP 1—Alcohol.
n Ask clients who already have covered the material to recall the discussion of triggers from Early
Recovery Skills (sessions 2 and 3) and share what they learned about external and internal
triggers with the group. The recovering co-leader can share his or her experiences with triggers.
n Ask clients to discuss what people, places, situations, and mental and emotional states act as
triggers for them.
n Survey clients’ success at stopping drinking. How many have tried? How many have succeeded?
n Ask clients to recall a time when they saw that someone else’s judgment was affected by drink-
ing. What does this tell them about their ability to make smart decisions about recovery while
they still are drinking?
n Encourage clients to discuss ways they have become dependent on alcohol in social situations.
(Note: Although it is important for clients to discuss their experiences, the counselor should
ensure that clients do not detour into elaborate descriptions of substance use that could act
as triggers.)
n Ask clients how they can prepare themselves for situations in which they formerly used alcohol.
n Urge clients to think about situations to avoid if they are to remain abstinent.
n Ask clients what changes they can make in their celebrations with family and friends to remain
abstinent.
The counselor should end this portion of the group session by reassuring clients that everyone who
stops drinking must work through the same difficulties. The longer clients are abstinent, the easier it
will be for them to manage these difficult situations.
Open Discussion (30 minutes)

Although it is important for clients to be able to speak about what is on their minds, the counselor
should make sure that the session’s topic has been explored completely.
Homework
To prepare for abstinence, instruct clients to use their journal or pages 6 and 7 of their Client’s
Treatment Companion to solidify their plans. Ask clients to write down situations that pose the greatest
threat to their sobriety and, for each situation, detail three alternatives to help them avoid drinking.
93
Session 2: Boredom
Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that boredom poses a risk to their recovery.
n Help clients understand that the situation will improve with time.
n Help clients identify new activities and techniques that will help them through their boredom.
Handout
n RP 2—Boredom

1. Understanding the Risk Boredom Poses
Boredom is a precursor to relapse. For many clients, boredom is a trigger: when they were bored,
they would use. Unless clients take some action, the boredom—and the relapse risk that accompanies
it—will not dissipate. To have a successful recovery, clients must continue to make progress. Standing
still can mean losing ground. Clients need to take action to combat the inertia that boredom represents.
2. Understanding the Reasons for Boredom

Some of the boredom clients feel can be attributed to the shift from a substance-using to a substance-
free lifestyle. When contrasted with the emotional highs and lows of substance use, an abstinent life can
seem dull. The brain still is adjusting to the lack of substances. While the brain heals, clients may feel
listless or bored. The period from 2 to 4 months into recovery (known as the Wall) is often characterized
by emotional flatness and boredom. Finally, the structure clients must impose to have a successful
recovery may not offer them the short-term emotional rewards of a substance-using lifestyle.
It is important for clients to know that, as their body and mind adjust to recovery, boredom will become
less of an issue.
3. Addressing Boredom
There are several ways clients can reduce feelings of boredom. The skills clients learn in the Early
Recovery Skills group can be put to use. For example, scheduling every hour of every day helps
clients identify unplanned sections of time that can be used to explore interesting activities. Starting
new hobbies or picking up interests that were abandoned while clients were using is a good way to
defeat boredom. Some clients schedule something that they can look forward to: a long weekend, a
visit with family, a concert, a movie. It also may help clients to discuss their feelings of boredom with a
spouse, loved one, or trusted friend. Starting new friendships with substance-free people met through
12-Step or mutual-help groups also can help alleviate clients’ boredom. (The counselor should remind
clients that intense personal involvements—including romantic or sexual relationships—among group
members are discouraged.)
The danger of boredom during recovery is that it encourages clients just to float along. Before they
know it, clients can drift from abstinence into relapse. The most important thing clients can do is take an
94
active role in their recovery. Engaging in some kind of process and working toward a goal—taking up a
hobby, planning a vacation, starting a friendship—also help clients move toward their recovery goals.

n Go over handout RP 2—Boredom.
n Ask clients whether they are having trouble with boredom. When did they first notice it?
n Ask what actions clients have taken to counter boredom.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experiences with boredom.
n Ask clients to list new activities they have tried or might try to help them during recovery. How
have these activities affected or will they affect their recovery?
n Survey the clients to learn how many are scheduling activities. Ask them to share how scheduling
has helped them.
n Ask clients what kinds of activities they can plan and anticipate to help them counter boredom.
n Remind clients that although structure is important to recovery, sometimes boredom results from
too much routine. People who are stuck in a boring rut can be heading toward relapse. Boredom
can indicate that clients are not challenging themselves enough in their daily lives. Encourage
clients to try new things that will advance their personal growth and bolster their recovery.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share with clients the activities and techniques that helped him
or her defeat boredom.

The counselor should carry over from the previous discussion any important issues that have not
been addressed fully. Although it is important for clients to be able to speak about what is on their
minds, the counselor should make sure that the session’s topic has been explored completely.
Five minutes before the end of open discussion, the counselor should ask clients to share briefly their
experience of doing the homework from the previous session. The counselor can decide how detailed
the followup on homework should be. The goal of asking is not to discover which clients have not
done the homework but to encourage clients to work on their recovery between sessions and to share
that work with the group.
Homework
Have clients keep a record of their emotional states, staying vigilant for signs of boredom.
95
Session 3: Avoiding Relapse Drift

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the process of relapse drift.
n Help clients identify things in their lives that are anchoring their recovery.
n Help clients identify things that must be avoided because they threaten to send clients into
relapse drift.
Handouts
n RP 3A—Avoiding Relapse Drift
n RP 3B—Mooring Lines Recovery Chart

1. Understanding How Relapse Drift Can Lead to Relapse
In the group session on boredom (RP session 2) clients learned that boredom can be a sign that they
are not taking an active role in their recovery, that they are just going with the flow. Relapse drift is the
process by which people slide from abstinence to relapse without even realizing what is happening. A
useful comparison is that of sailors who anchor a boat before going to sleep below decks. If the
anchor is not properly set, the boat will drift away during the night; the sailors wake up to find they
are in unfamiliar waters, far from their safe anchorage.
Although relapse may feel like a sudden occurrence—an unforeseeable disruption of recovery—often
it is the result of a gradual movement away from abstinence that is so subtle clients can explain it
away or deny responsibility for it. Relapse rarely occurs without warning signs. Clients need to remain
vigilant for signs of relapse. (In Early Recovery Skills session 7, these early warnings of relapse were
referred to as addictive behaviors.)
2. Understanding the Importance of Mooring Lines

People who are successful in recovery find ways to remain abstinent. Pursuing certain activities or
avoiding certain people and situations becomes essential to maintaining recovery. Identifying these
recovery-supporting behaviors and checking to make sure they are in place also are essential to
maintaining abstinence. These recovery-supporting behaviors are the “mooring lines” of people in
recovery. They keep clients anchored in recovery and alert them to the first signs of relapse drift.
Clients need to examine their recovery process and identify their mooring lines. Doing so allows them
to list and monitor the things that are anchoring their recovery.
3. Monitoring Mooring Lines

To monitor their mooring lines, clients need to identify them and list them as specifically as possible.
Merely listing “Exercise” is not as helpful to the client as listing “Ride bike for at least 30 minutes,
4 times a week.” Likewise, listing a friend as a mooring line is not as helpful as writing “Talk on the phone
with Louisa once a week.” Clients should avoid listing attitudes or things that are not quantifiable as
96
mooring lines. Although a feeling of optimism may help clients stay abstinent, it is not easy to monitor.
The goal is to have clients make a list of activities or behaviors whose presence or absence they can
note. Detailed, concrete listings give clients better indications of whether their mooring lines are secure.

Clients should be given time to read handout RP3—Avoiding Relapse Drift and complete handout
RP3B—Mooring Lines Recovery Chart before the discussion begins. Clients should not be forced to
comply if they find it difficult or uncomfortable to complete the handout in the group. The handout is
primarily a tool for discussion. The counselor steers clients away from reading their responses and
encourages them to converse about the issues the handout raises. The counselor ensures that all
clients have an opportunity to participate.
n Go over handout RP 3A—Avoiding Relapse Drift. Cover any aspects of the topic that were not
addressed in the didactic portion of the session.
n Go over handout RP 3B—Mooring Lines Recovery Chart. Give clients 5 to 10 minutes to
complete this chart.
n Ask clients to share the activities, behaviors, and people they identified as mooring lines.
n Have clients explain how one of their mooring lines helps keep them abstinent and secure in
their recovery.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experience with mooring lines. Have they
stayed the same over time? Or has the co-leader added new mooring lines as recovery has
progressed?
n Ask clients to share the activities, behaviors, and people they must avoid if their recovery is to
remain anchored.
n Ask clients how often they will check their mooring lines. It is recommended that they check
them at least weekly.
n Review with clients the steps they can take if they realize that more than two of their mooring
lines are missing and they are drifting toward relapse.

Homework
Instruct clients to check their mooring lines once before the next RP session.
97
Session 4: Work and Recovery

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand how their work life affects their recovery.
n Help clients examine possible solutions to problems that work poses to their recovery.
Handout
n RP 4—Work and Recovery

1. Understanding Conflicts Between Work and Recovery
Recovery takes a total commitment from clients, yet few people can afford to ignore their jobs or stop
job-hunting and focus solely on their recovery. As a result, many clients experience conflicts between
employment issues and recovery. Some conflicts may be difficult to resolve; it is important to acknowl-
edge conflicts that exist and work toward solutions.
2. Finding Balance Between Work and Recovery

Although the four work situations on the handout RP 4—Work and Recovery are very different, some
general principles can help clients address them. Because treatment must coexist with work, clients
may have to find ways to cut back on their work commitments to incorporate all the activities and
demands of recovery. Finding this balance may require employees to request that their work schedules
be adjusted.
Clients who are in jobs that contributed to their substance use problem (e.g., where other people use
substances or where the client is paid in cash) face a dilemma. Clients may feel that it is better to quit
such a job, yet major change or upheaval is not recommended during the first 6 months to a year of
recovery. Unemployment may seem preferable if the job poses risks to relapse. However, without the
structure of and income from work, clients may have difficulties committing to recovery.
Although it is unpaid, recovery is work in a real sense. And recovery may be more important to clients’
happiness and success than their paying work. Clients should be encouraged to devote as much time
and effort as they can to their recovery.

Clients should be given time to read the handout before the discussion begins. The handout is
primarily a tool for discussion. The counselor encourages clients to converse about the issues the
handout raises. The counselor ensures that all clients have an opportunity to participate.
n Go over handout RP 4—Work and Recovery.
n Ask clients to share which of the work situations best fits them. Are there other situations that
are not listed on the sheet that apply?
98
n Ask what compromises and changes clients have made to find time for recovery.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experience with balancing work and recovery.
Has striking that balance gotten easier as recovery has progressed?
n Allow clients to debate the pros and cons of leaving a job that is obstructing recovery.
n Ask clients whether they have worked with their bosses or their company’s employee assistance
program to make it easier to commit to treatment activities.
n Ask whether there are clients in the group who opted for intensive outpatient treatment over
inpatient treatment because of the demands of their jobs.

Homework
Ask clients to examine their commitment to recovery and come up with two new strategies for effec-
tively balancing work and recovery.
99
Session 5: Guilt and Shame

Note: This topic should not be used when there is a client attending his or her first RP group session.
If there is a client new to the group, the counselor should choose a different topic for the session so
that a new member is introduced to the group with a less daunting subject.
Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the difference between guilt and shame.
n Help clients learn strategies for coping with guilt and shame.
Handout
n RP 5—Guilt and Shame

1. Differentiating Guilt From Shame
Guilt refers to feeling bad about things one has done or failed to do. For example, one might feel
guilty for cheating on a spouse or for neglecting to keep promises to a child. Shame goes beyond a
response to a specific action or behavior. Shame means feeling bad about who one is—a belief that
one is defective or unworthy.
Feelings of guilt and shame are often part of people’s responses to substance abuse. But it is impor-
tant for clients to distinguish between the two. Guilt can be a useful reaction in recovery, indicating to
clients that they have done something that goes against their value system. Guilt can motivate clients
to seek forgiveness and make amends for the pain and trouble they have caused others. However, if
clients are convinced they are bad people, they may feel unworthy of recovery and feel that they have
a license to use substances. Shame can be an impediment to abstinence.
2. Addressing Feelings of Guilt and Shame

Both guilt and shame can erode a client’s self-esteem and self-confidence. Focusing on negative
feelings can cause clients to turn to substance use to alter their mood or to escape. Clients should be
reminded that their substance abuse is not related to their being bad or weak. To stay abstinent,
clients need to be smart and work hard, and part of being smart and working hard is understanding
their feelings. What things do they feel guilty about? What has contributed to their feelings of shame?
Clients may need time to work through feelings of guilt and shame. Clients need to give themselves
time to feel better about themselves and their behaviors. Talking about feelings of guilt and shame
also may help clients, as can making amends.

100
n Go over handout RP 5—Guilt and Shame.
n Ask clients to list the things that they feel guilty for doing and for neglecting to do.
n Remind clients that it is all right to have made mistakes; they cannot change the things they did
in the past. Ask whether they are able to forgive themselves for past mistakes.
n Have clients discuss the difference between moving past guilt by forgiving themselves and
simply letting themselves off the hook.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experience of overcoming guilt. How did the
co-leader balance the need to take responsibility for past actions with the need to forgive those
actions?
n Have clients discuss how they can get over feelings of guilt and shame. What positive behaviors
can they engage in that will aid this process?
n Ask clients who are attending 12-Step or mutual-help meetings whether guilt and shame have
been discussed in meetings. Ask how these discussions have been helpful.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss how mutual-help fellowship has helped him or her cope
with guilt and shame.

Homework
Encourage clients to think about people from whom they may need to ask forgiveness. How will they
approach these people? What can they do to put things right with the people they have hurt?
101
Session 6: Staying Busy

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the importance of scheduling activities.
n Help clients understand how idle time can be a trigger to use.
n Help clients learn and share strategies for scheduling and staying busy.
Handout
n RP 6—Staying Busy

1. Understanding the Importance of Scheduling and Structure to Recovery
Most clients in this session already will have been introduced to the practice of scheduling in the
Early Recovery Skills group (Early Recovery Skills session 1). However, the structure that scheduling
provides is so important to recovery that the principle should be reviewed here. Clients are reminded
that many people who abuse substances organize their days around procuring, using, and recovering
from the substances. Without these activities to structure their time, many people with a substance
use disorder feel a void or sense of loss. Finding new activities and new ways to occupy their time
and replace that sense of loss is a major component of recovery for clients. It is important for clients
to write down their schedules. Schedules that exist only in one’s head are too easy to revise or aban-
don. When clients are making their schedules, special attention should be paid to weekends and other
times clients feel they are particularly vulnerable to substance use.
2. Understanding How Free Time Can Act as a Trigger

Because using was a habitual activity for clients, their minds gravitate back to thoughts of using if they
have nothing to do and nowhere to go. Then, the thought–craving–use process begins, and clients are
on their way to relapse. Being alone also can be a trigger for clients. Before they entered treatment,
many probably isolated themselves from friends and loved ones when they used. For this reason, it is
important not just that clients schedule substance-free activities but that these activities involve other
people who are living a substance-free life (e.g., people clients meet at mutual-help meetings) or are
committed to the clients’ recovery (e.g., family members and friends).
3. Incorporating New Activities and New People

Even clients who are committed to recovery can miss aspects of a substance-using lifestyle. Scheduling
activities and staying busy are ways to keep clients engaged in their new lives without substance use.
Some clients are interested sufficiently by picking up old hobbies or activities; others need the increased
interest that is generated by new activities and new acquaintances. Although the focus of their lives
must be recovery, clients are encouraged to think of recovery as a time to try something they have put
off: volunteering, taking up a new sport, learning to play a musical instrument.
102

n Go over handout RP 6—Staying Busy.
n Ask clients to think about how unfilled time and an unoccupied mind can act as triggers.
n Ask whether clients have felt tempted to use when they had too much free time on their hands.
How did they respond?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her strategies for staying busy to keep recovery
on track.
n Ask clients whether they always used in groups or tended to use alone. Discuss the dangers of
being alone for those who tend to isolate themselves.
n Ask clients what activities have helped them stay busy and stay abstinent since they stopped
using.
n Solicit suggestions from clients for hobbies or activities they would like to try that they feel will
help them stay abstinent.
n Ask clients whether they have made new friends through mutual-help meetings. What activities
have they pursued outside meetings?

Homework
Instruct clients to make a wish list of activities they would like to pursue. The lists could include
activities that they learned about from other clients in the group.
103
Session 7: Motivation for Recovery

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that the motivation that brought them into treatment may change as they
progress in treatment.
n Help clients recognize new motivations and strategies for staying abstinent.
n Help clients identify benefits from recovery.
Handout
n RP 7—Motivation for Recovery

1. Understanding That Reasons for Staying in Treatment Evolve Over Time
Clients know that they must remain steadfast in recovery. This knowledge may lead some to believe
that their motivation for remaining abstinent must always be the same. It does not matter what brings
clients into treatment in the first place. What is important is what motivates clients to stay abstinent
each day. The counselor might remind clients that, although staying abstinent is a lifelong goal, they
can achieve it only hour by hour and day by day. Clients may find that their reasons for staying absti-
nent change over time. Some clients may realize this for the first time as a result of handout RP 7 and
the ensuing discussion.
2. Using New Strategies as Motivations Evolve

Clients may enter treatment because they are afraid of what will happen if they do not stop using sub-
stances. Clients may find that if they focus on staying abstinent, their initial motivation for not using
drugs and alcohol will evolve into a personal, internal desire to maintain their new lives.
3. Remaining Abstinent Long Enough To See the Benefits of Recovery

When clients have been abstinent long enough to experience the benefits that abstinence brings, the
desire to see those benefits persist becomes a powerful motivator for clients to stay in recovery. Clients
are able to address problems with family, friends, and employment that resulted from substance abuse.
In place of feeling the shame and having the self-defeating attitude that characterize many people who
abuse substances, clients now can take pride in their abstinence and their new lives.

104
n Go over handout RP 7—Motivation for Recovery.
n Ask clients what assumptions they made about the various motivations for starting treatment
listed on RP 7—Motivation for Recovery. Which motivations seem the strongest?
n Ask clients to discuss the reasons that brought them to treatment.
n Ask whether the same things are motivating them today that motivated them when they
started treatment.
n Ask what motivates clients to stay in treatment and be abstinent now.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss how his or her motivations evolved from the start
of treatment.
n Ask clients whether they feel that they are running out of reasons for staying in treatment.
n Ask the group to suggest reasons for staying abstinent and in treatment.

Homework
Ask clients to add to the list of current motivations they made during this session. Instruct them to
identify three more reasons for them to stay in treatment.
105
Session 8: Truthfulness
Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that substance dependence and truthfulness are irreconcilable states.
n Help clients acknowledge that truthfulness will not always be easy.
n Help clients understand that continued truthfulness is integral to successful recovery.
Handout
n RP 8—Truthfulness

1. Understanding That Substance Dependence Is Based in Unreality and Recovery Is
Based in Truth
Substance dependence represents an escape from the realities of life, a flight from responsibility, and
a denial of consequences. Maintaining a substance-abusing lifestyle requires people to lie and make
excuses continually. Entering recovery represents the first step toward acknowledging the truth of
substance dependence. To be successful, recovery must continue to be grounded in truth. This means
not just that clients acknowledge that they have a substance use problem but also that they make a
commitment to behave truthfully with the people in their lives.
2. Understanding the Difficulties Posed by Truthfulness

Often it is hard for clients to be honest with themselves about their substance abuse. Having taken the
step to enter treatment and be truthful with themselves, they now face the more daunting task of being
honest with those around them. Being honest with friends and loved ones can be harrowing. Clients
risk driving away friends and alienating family members when they give an honest account of their
actions while they were using. Clients may be embarrassed to admit their actions. Loved ones may be
offended by clients’ blunt approach to truth telling.
The RP group is a good place for clients to get used to telling the truth. Other group members may
take offense, but that, too, provides good practice for addressing the responses of family members
and friends.
3. Understanding That Recovery Cannot Be Successful Without Truthfulness

If clients choose to be in treatment without being totally truthful, they have not committed fully to
recovery. It is as if by continuing to deceive and be less than truthful, these clients are holding back,
refusing to become involved fully in their recovery.

Clients should be given time to complete the handout before the discussion begins. Clients should
not be forced to comply if they find it difficult or uncomfortable to complete the handout in the group.
106
The handout is primarily a tool for discussion. The counselor steers clients away from reading their
n Go over handout RP 8—Truthfulness.
n Ask clients to make an honest assessment of the ways they were dishonest when they were
using. Encourage them to look beyond obvious lies and discuss ways in which they misled
people or let them believe something that was not true.
n Discuss the limits of truth telling. What types of things should clients be sure they are always
honest about? Are there situations in which it is all right not to be completely honest?
n Ask clients to think about the consequences of telling the truth to friends and family members.
Does the prospect of doing so upset them?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her experiences of telling the truth to friends and
family members.
n Ask whether clients are experiencing difficulty telling the truth in group.
n Ask what problems clients have encountered. What positive experiences have come from
being honest?

Homework
Encourage clients to speak truthfully about their substance abuse with a friend or family member
before the next RP group meeting.
107
Session 9: Total Abstinence

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that they need to stop using alcohol and all mood-altering drugs.
n Help clients understand that continued substance use will cloud their decisionmaking and
endanger recovery.
Handout
n RP 9—Total Abstinence

1. Understanding the Connection Between Alcohol and Other Substance Use and Relapse
to Stimulants
Substance abuse clouds judgment and throws lives out of balance. People and things that had been
priorities before a person became substance dependent—family, friends, work—often get ignored as
substance abuse takes precedence. To put their lives back into balance and to reorient their priorities,
clients need to be able to think and act clearly. Stopping stimulant use is an important part of this
process. But continued use of marijuana, another drug, or alcohol can jeopardize this process.
Clients may not think these other substances pose a problem. Some may even argue that occasional
use of alcohol or marijuana helps them cope with the stress of stopping stimulant use. Clients need to
be convinced that any substance use will interfere with their brain’s ability to heal and their mind’s abil-
ity to reason clearly. Any substance use interferes with recovery. However, the counselor makes it
clear that clients should continue to take prescribed medications required to treat chronic physical or
mental disorders.
2. Understanding That It Is Not Possible To Learn How To Cope Without Stimulants if Clients
Turn to Alcohol or Marijuana or Other Substances To Escape
The counselor reminds clients that they signed an agreement not to use any substances when they
began treatment. Even if clients have not used stimulants during treatment, use of alcohol or other
mood-altering substances is a way of avoiding a full commitment to recovery. By continuing to use
substances, clients are hedging their bets, using alcohol or marijuana as an escape hatch in the event
that recovery is too hard. Clients lessen their chances of successful recovery for stimulant depend-
ence if they continue to use alcohol and other substances, even once in a while. Alcohol use makes
relapse to stimulant use eight times more likely; marijuana use makes relapse three times more likely
(Rawson et al. 1995).

108
n Go over handout RP 9—Total Abstinence.
n Ask clients to share their responses to the “no substance use” agreement they signed on
admittance to treatment.
n Ask whether clients find themselves coming up with justifications for drinking or getting high.
What are these justifications?
n Ask whether some clients have come to appreciate the logic of ceasing all substance use.
What changed their minds?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her experiences with the “no substance use”
policy.
n Ask clients to think about what changes they have made or will have to make in their lives to
eliminate use of alcohol and marijuana (e.g., get rid of all the alcohol in the house, ask family
members or housemates not to bring home pot, advise loved ones that they have stopped
drinking and getting high).
n Ask clients who have stopped all substance use to share with the group reasons why total
abstinence is a good idea.

Homework
Instruct clients to list the steps they will take to begin totally abstinent recovery. Ask clients who are
already in compliance with the “no substance use” agreement to list reasons they will maintain total
abstinence. Clients can use their journals or pages 8 and 9 of their Client’s Treatment Companion.
109
Session 10: Sex and Recovery

Note: This topic should not be used when there is a client attending his or her first RP group session.
If there is a client new to the group, the counselor should choose a different topic for the session so
that a new member is introduced to the group with a less sensitive and intimate subject.
Goals of Session
n Help clients understand distinctions between intimate sex and impulsive sex.
n Help clients understand that impulsive sex can be a form of dependence and can lead
to relapse.
n Help clients appreciate the importance of stable relationships.
Handout
n RP 10—Sex and Recovery

1. Understanding What Distinguishes Intimate Sex From Impulsive Sex
The counselor should anticipate that this topic will be met with some nervous laughter and joking from
clients. This response may be unavoidable. However, the counselor and recovering co-leader need to
take a serious approach to the topic and maintain a serious atmosphere during discussion.
The distinction between intimate and impulsive sex depends on the relationship with the sexual part-
ner. Intimate sex is a caring act that takes place in the context of a relationship. It is an extension of
the feelings that two people have for each other. Impulsive sex is a selfish act in which the sexual
partner is being used to achieve a type of high. The feelings of the partner are irrelevant. Impulsive,
selfish sex need not even involve another person; excessive masturbation is a form of impulsive sex.
Counselors should ensure that all clients understand that they run the risk of contracting HIV/AIDS
and other sexually transmitted diseases if they engage in impulsive and unprotected sex.
2. Understanding How Impulsive Sex Can Act as a Trigger for Substance Use
For some clients, impulsive sex was linked with substance use before they came into treatment. They
usually would have sex when they were using. Other clients may turn to impulsive sex to achieve a
kind of high after they have stopped using substances. In both cases, impulsive sex is a trigger for
substance use and can lead to relapse. Clients even can become dependent on impulsive sex just as
they were dependent on substances.
3. Understanding How Intimacy and Stable Relationships Can Support Recovery

Many components of a stable relationship also are important to a successful recovery. Clients who
have relationships characterized by trust, honesty, and support should find it easier to participate fully
110
in recovery activities, support others in group sessions, and be truthful about their lives. A stable
relationship that includes intimate sex can help support recovery.

n Go over handout RP 10—Sex and Recovery.
n As the discussion begins, be sure to keep the group focused on the importance of these issues
to recovery.
n Ensure that clients understand the difference between impulsive sex and intimate sex.
n If clients are not in a relationship, help them determine whether they need a period of celibacy
to support their recovery. For some clients, sex and stimulant use are so intertwined that any
feelings of arousal can act as a trigger. With abstinence from substances, the connection
between arousal and stimulant use will diminish.
n Ask clients to discuss the connection between impulsive sex and substance use in their lives.
n Ask clients to discuss rewarding, caring relationships they have had or currently have.
n Ask what features of these relationships help support clients’ recovery.

Homework
Have clients list specific ways they can make their current relationship more caring, supportive, and
intimate. If clients are not in a relationship, ask them to focus on ways to improve their next relationship.
111
Session 11: Anticipating and Preventing Relapse

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand what relapse is and how it develops.
n Help clients recognize the warning signs of relapse.
n Help clients develop strategies for avoiding relapse.
Handout
n RP 11—Anticipating and Preventing Relapse

1. Understanding That Staying Abstinent Is Different From Deciding To Stop Using Substances
The decision to stop using substances and enter treatment is important. But having decided once to
stop using, clients must now decide every day not to start using again. Now that they have stopped
using and are in treatment, clients need to be vigilant about signs of relapse. Using is familiar and
comfortable behavior; clients’ bodies and minds will want to return to using. So clients must anticipate
and prevent relapse.
2. Learning To Recognize Emotional Buildup and Addictive Behaviors

Being on guard for relapse means that clients are attuned to their physical and emotional well-being.
Persistent, nagging emotions (e.g., boredom, anxiety, irritability, depression) or physical symptoms
(e.g., insomnia, headaches) often can serve as triggers in the relapse process. Likewise, clients may
find themselves engaging in the behaviors that used to accompany their substance abuse (e.g., lying,
stealing, acting compulsively). These addictive behaviors are like an alarm bell; they tell clients that a
relapse is on the way unless the clients take action.
3. Enacting a Plan To Avoid Relapse

Clients need to plan in advance how they will intervene when they are at risk of relapse. Different
interventions work for different clients. Common actions that help are talking with a trusted friend or
family member, going to a mutual-help meeting, talking to a counselor, exercising, or doing something
to move out of a rut, such as taking a day off from work. Clients should think about what will work for
them and be prepared to put their plan into action at the first sign of a relapse.

112
n Go over handout RP 11—Anticipating and Preventing Relapse.
n Make sure clients understand what relapse is and appreciate the importance of relapse
prevention.
n Ask clients to describe the activities that they engaged in when they were using. These are
addictive behaviors. Have these behaviors crept back into their lives?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to give examples of addictive behavior from his or her experience.
n Emotional buildup may be a difficult concept for clients to grasp. Ask the recovering co-leader to
describe how emotions can build up and lead to relapse.
n The concept of addictive thinking will be addressed further in two sessions on relapse justification.
For now, have clients discuss justifications for engaging in behaviors that could lead to relapse.
n Ask clients what indications of an impending relapse they will look out for.
n Ask clients to share their plans for avoiding relapse. Encourage them to be specific about
their plans.

Homework
Ask clients what they are doing on a regular basis to avoid relapse. Have clients record the steps they
are taking to avoid triggers and stop thoughts of using.
113
Session 12: Trust

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the role that trust plays in their relationships.
n Help clients understand the necessity of restoring lost trust.
n Help clients cope with suspicions of continued substance abuse.
Handout
n RP 12—Trust

1. Understanding the Damage That Substance Abuse Does to Trusting Relationships
People who use substances often find themselves concealing their behavior from those they care
about with deceit and lies. If the substance abuse comes to light, the people who have been lied to
often have a hard time trusting the person who has been deceiving them. Once trust has been violat-
ed, it is not easy to win back. Trust that has been earned over years can be demolished with a single
act. And it may take a long time to convince people that the person who destroyed their trust is worthy
of being trusted again.
2. Restoring Trust in Relationships

The only way for clients to rebuild trusting relationships with those they have wronged is by staying
abstinent and making amends for the harm they have done. The process of restoring the trust is more
laborious than the blow that brought it down. Clients cannot expect their friends and family members
to believe that they will remain abstinent. Clients have to provide evidence that they can be trusted
again.
3. Coping With Suspicions of Continued Substance Use

Earning back people’s trust can be a frustrating process. Clients may feel that they have been absti-
nent long enough for their loved ones to trust them again. However, clients must understand that
restoring trust does not happen on the clients’ schedule. Rebuilding a trusting relationship may take
time, even if both parties are committed to the process. Clients should be prepared to cope with the
frustration that comes from being suspected of using even though they have not done so.

114
n Go over handout RP 12—Trust.
n Ask clients to discuss relationships that they have damaged by losing the trust of others.
n Ask clients whether they can work to rebuild these relationships.
n Ask clients to put themselves in the shoes of someone whose trust they violated. Encourage
them to empathize with that person. How might it feel for clients to have their trust taken
from them?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss a relationship that was damaged by substance abuse
and how he or she is working to restore the other person’s trust.
n Ask clients to discuss how they will respond if their loved ones are suspicious of them even
though clients have stopped using and are doing their best to repair damaged relationships.
n Ask clients what they can do, in addition to staying abstinent, to earn back the trust of those they
care about.
n Ask clients how they will respond if some relationships are severely damaged, if it seems that
the lost trust cannot be restored.

Homework
Have clients list three positive ways in which they can respond to a loved one who refuses to trust
them even though the clients have remained abstinent.
115
Session 13: Be Smart, Not Strong

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that recovery is not mainly a test of will, but of commitment and smart
planning.
n Help clients understand the importance of avoiding triggers and relapse situations.
n Help clients assess the efficacy of their approach to recovery.
Handout
n RP 13—Be Smart, Not Strong

1. Understanding That Substance Dependence Is Stronger Than the Individual
When people become dependent on a substance, chemical processes are at work on a biological
level that cause cravings. Clients cannot conquer these cravings merely by an assertion of will
anymore than they can concentrate and make feelings of hunger disappear. With longer abstinence,
cravings will fade. The physical processes that clients set in motion when they became dependent on
stimulants are stronger than their willpower. Most people who come into treatment have tried very
hard on their own not to use. But quitting is not just a matter of deciding not to use and then gritting
one’s teeth. It requires clients to be smart and make plans to remain abstinent.
2. Understanding the Importance of Avoiding Triggers to Abuse and Likely Abuse Situations
No matter how strong clients’ desire to remain abstinent, wanting to be abstinent is not enough by
itself. People who are able to stop using and stay abstinent do so by being smart. Clients need to use
the relapse prevention skills they learn in these sessions and in Early Recovery Skills sessions to
ensure that they are avoiding triggers and relapse situations. Clients should take a hard, honest look
at the people, emotions, and situations that are linked to their substance abuse, make a list of these
triggers, and then make a commitment to avoid them. Likewise, clients should analyze situations for
their risk potential. If a group of friends always winds up at a bar, clients need to avoid that group of
friends. If substances are prevalent at a certain club, clients need to avoid that club.
3. Assessing How Well Prepared Clients Are To Avoid Relapse

Clients need to have an accurate idea of how smart their approach to recovery is. Avoiding triggers
and relapse situations is not all there is to recovery. But doing these things helps support the complete
lifestyle change necessary for a solid recovery. The more skills clients have at their disposal to help
them avoid triggers and prevent relapse, the stronger their recovery will be. The techniques clients
learn in Early Recovery Skills sessions should be thought of as tools to use to stay abstinent. For
recovery to be successful, clients need to have as many tools in their toolboxes as possible.
116

n Go over handout RP 13—Be Smart, Not Strong.
n Ask clients whether the statements at the top of the handout sound familiar.
n Ask clients to discuss the difference between being strong and being smart, in the context of
recovery.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her experience with trying to be strong and
being smart.
n Have clients calculate their Recovery IQ.
n Review the various techniques listed on the chart. Do clients understand the importance of all
these techniques?
n Ask clients what they can do to work on the techniques they currently are not practicing.

Homework
Have clients choose 1 of the 11 relapse prevention techniques for which they rated themselves fair or
poor and describe how they will work to improve that rating. Clients can write in their journals or on
pages 10 and 11 of their Client’s Treatment Companion.
117
Session 14: Defining Spirituality

Note: Clients may have passionately held beliefs about religion and spirituality. This session is not
designed to change clients’ ideas about religion. The goal is to provide clients a constructive way
to approach 12-Step meetings and recovery that is not explicitly religious. Because the material is
potentially contentious, the counselor may want to take a few moments at the start of this session to
remind clients to be respectful of one another.
Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the difference between religion and spirituality.
n Help clients explore their beliefs so they can understand better what will bring them happiness.
n Help clients see that success in recovery can be bolstered by spiritual beliefs.
Handout
n RP 14—Defining Spirituality

1. Understanding That Spirituality Is About Inner Strength and Peace, Not Necessarily About
Belief in God
Spirituality has been shown to be an important component in recovery. It occupies a prominent place in
12-Step and mutual-help programs. It should be expected that some clients will have objections to this
part of the recovery process. Some may feel that spirituality equates with belief in the Christian God and
excludes people of other faiths. Some may feel that it is a sign of weakness to look for help outside them-
selves. Some may feel that their struggle with substance abuse is physical and cannot be aided by
appealing to God. These clients should be reassured that spirituality is not the same as organized religion
and does not always involve belief in God. Likewise, including spirituality as an aspect of recovery is not a
sign of weakness. Clients’ spirituality should be seen as a source of strength that they may not be using.
2. Assessing What Spirituality Means for Individual Clients

Many people are more concerned with the physical aspects of their lives than with the spiritual aspects.
During recovery, clients should examine the quality of their spiritual lives. Spirituality can be a source
of strength, but clients first must understand what spirituality means to them and how it affects their
lives. The goal is for clients to find a source they can draw on for inner strength and peace—a quiet
satisfaction—that supplants their desire to abuse substances.
3. Linking Spirituality With 12-Step or Mutual-Help Groups

Along with fellowship, spirituality is the foundation of 12-Step and mutual-help programs. Clients who
are closed off to the spiritual aspects of recovery have a hard time benefiting from these recovery
groups. Twelve-Step programs invoke a higher power and often close with the Serenity Prayer. Clients
who are uncomfortable with a strictly religious meaning of the prayer can think of these elements in
the broadest terms: higher power can refer to the inner source of strength provided by spirituality, and
118
the Serenity Prayer can be thought of as a wise saying about achieving inner peace rather than as a
supplication to God.
Twelve-Step and mutual-help groups are not the only means to incorporate spirituality into one’s life.
The counselor should be familiar with other supportive options that may be better suited to clients,
depending on their values, religion, or culture.

n Go over handout RP 14—Defining Spirituality.
n Have clients discuss the four definitions of spirituality provided plus additional definitions that
clients may suggest. It is important for clients to understand that spirituality may include one or
more of the definitions listed on the handout. In other words, clients should not be led to believe
that the first response listed is wrong.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share what spirituality means to him or her. How has spirituality
played a part in the co-leader’s recovery?
n Encourage clients to be honest and detailed in their responses to the four questions on the
handout. The questions are personal, but all clients in the group can benefit from listening to
one another’s honest appraisals of the spiritual aspects of their lives.
n Clients who use spirituality to help themselves achieve inner peace and support their recovery
should be encouraged to share their experiences. What has helped these clients? Meditation?
Reading certain writers or philosophers? Keeping a journal?

Homework
Encourage clients to attend a 12-Step, mutual-help, or spiritually oriented meeting before the next RP
session. Have them focus on the spiritual aspects of the meeting that they can apply to their recovery.
119
Session 15: Managing Life; Managing Money

Goals of Session
n Help clients identify important, practical areas in their lives that they have been neglecting.
n Help clients prioritize aspects of their lives.
n Help clients make a plan to be responsible about managing their lives.
n Help clients understand the importance of taking “baby steps.”
Handout
n RP 15—Managing Life; Managing Money

1. Understanding How Substance Dependence Encourages Irresponsibility
People who are substance dependent spend much of their time and energy preparing to use, using,
and recovering from using. People who are abusing substances narrow their world until most activities
not related to substance use are excluded. They neglect the normal day-to-day activities that are
necessary for a healthy and satisfying life.
People in recovery need to widen their view. They need to stop focusing on substance abuse and take
all aspects of their lives into account. Clients can think about entering recovery as an end to the tunnel
vision of substance dependence. Now, instead of focusing on a tiny portion of their lives and being sur-
rounded by darkness, as in a tunnel, clients can lift their heads and see the full panorama of their lives.
2. Understanding the Necessity of Bringing Life Back Into Control if Recovery Is To

Be Successful
People who are substance dependent often spend their time and money in irresponsible ways. Along
with deciding to stop abusing substances, clients need to decide to use their time and money more
wisely because these practices go a long way in determining quality of life. Exercising discipline in
how they spend time and money helps support clients in their recovery. Behaving responsibly also
helps them move beyond the guilt and shame they experienced as a result of abusing substances.
3. Understanding the Importance of Setting Goals To Be Responsible in Daily Living

The newfound awareness of all that they had been neglecting can be overwhelming to people in
recovery. The counselor should reassure clients that they are capable of taking up long-forgotten
responsibilities and getting on with their lives. Setting reasonable goals is integral to reassuming
responsibilities. Taken together, home repairs, debts, taxes, and court dates may seem like too much
for anyone to handle. Clients should prioritize the things they need to accomplish—set a goal that they
can achieve, achieve the goal, and then move on to the next goal.
120
4. Understanding the Importance of Taking “Baby Steps”

Clients often want to do too much too early in their recovery. The counselor should stress that clients
need to set small, manageable goals to avoid becoming overwhelmed and placing their recovery at risk.

n Go over handout RP 15—Managing Life; Managing Money.
n Ask clients to discuss the ways in which their lives were out of control when they were using.
n Ask clients what changes they have made since entering treatment that have helped them
regain control.
n Ask clients whether they are still struggling with problems related to daily life. What are they?
n Ask clients to determine which problems to tackle first.

n Ask the recovering co-leader to recount how he or she regained control of daily activities.
n Ask clients whether they have changed how they handle money since they have entered treatment.
n Ask clients what plans they have for opening a savings account and paying off debts.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share how he or she regained control of finances.

Homework
Have clients write a step-by-step plan for achieving one of their financial goals. Clients can write in
their journals or use pages 14 and 15 of their Client’s Treatment Companion.
121
Session 16: Relapse Justification I

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand what relapse justification is.
n Help clients identify the justifications to which they are susceptible.
n Help clients formulate plans to counter relapse justifications.
Handout
n RP 16—Relapse Justification I

1. Understanding the Dangers Posed by Relapse Justifications
Relapse justifications narrow the distance between abstinence and relapse so that it is easier for
people in recovery to go back to using. A relapse justification can seem harmless. A client’s addicted
brain may be telling him it is OK to hang out at a club where he used to use. The client is not intend-
ing to use when he goes out, but he makes relapse much more likely by giving himself permission to
go to the club. Another example is a woman who reasons that it is fine to go out with her old using
friends because they all know she is in recovery now and say they are supportive. Her addicted brain
convinces her she is reconnecting with old friends who say they want to help, but she also is placing
herself in a situation that makes relapse a distinct possibility.
2. Understanding Specific Justifications to Which Clients Are Susceptible

Relapses often seem to come out of nowhere. However, the addicted brain of a person who has entered
recovery recently is often busy making dangerous behaviors seem reasonable. This happens at a sub-
conscious level. Using a substance as a response to a certain event (e.g., a fight with a spouse, the loss
of a job) seems to be an automatic process. But the justification was ready, just waiting for the right set
of circumstances to emerge. Clients need to understand and anticipate the situations in which they are
vulnerable to relapse justifications. Knowing their weaknesses in advance allows clients to halt the auto-
matic process that leads from event to justification to relapse.
3. Addressing Specific Situations That Might Lead to Relapse

Relapse justifications are hard to avoid. Clients still may feel a physiological craving for the substance
until their minds and bodies are fully healed. Addicted brains will try to push clients to respond to
situations in ways that put them at risk. Although the justifications may pop into clients’ minds, clients
need to use their rational brains to resist relapse justifications and choose behaviors that support
recovery. The counselor should encourage clients to recognize the justifications that have worked
against them in the past and find safer responses to those dangerous situations. Clients should plan
what they will say if, for example, friends they formerly used with call to invite them out. Having a plan
allows clients to avoid hesitating, then being cajoled into going along. Clients should consider making
a list of potential relapse situations and determining how to avoid them in the future.
122

n Go over handout RP 16—Relapse Justification I.
n Ask whether clients have tried to stop using before and ended up relapsing. How did the
relapses occur? Did they seem to come out of the blue?
n Ask clients to discuss the relapse justifications to which they feel especially vulnerable.
n Have the recovering co-leader discuss experiences with relapse justifications, both the times when
relapse occurred and the times when anticipating a potential relapse situation helped prevent relapse.
n Have clients discuss specific catastrophic events and negative emotions that make them more
likely to use. Are there events and emotions not listed on the worksheet that are troublesome?
n Ask clients whether they are more vulnerable to relapse from positive or negative emotions.
n Have clients discuss specific relapse justifications their addicted brains have used on them.

Homework
Have clients identify a relapse justification, write a description of it, and script a response that will help
them avoid relapse.
123
Session 17: Taking Care of Yourself

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the importance of taking care of themselves.
n Help clients understand the importance of self-esteem to recovery.
n Help clients identify aspects of their lives that require change.
Handout
n RP 17—Taking Care of Yourself

1. Understanding the Ways in Which Taking Care of Themselves Can Aid Clients’ Recovery
One of the many things clients can do to support their recovery is boost their self-esteem. Client’s
substance abuse may have resulted partly from low self-esteem; low self-esteem also can be one of
the effects of substance dependence. Clients can get caught in a downward spiral in which they feel
bad about their lives, so they use. Using confirms that their lives have little value, which lowers their
self-esteem and leads to more substance abuse.
Clients in treatment have stopped their substance use, but they also need to break the cycle of low self-
esteem and begin to see value in their lives and themselves. Looking after their health and grooming
helps clients respect themselves. Clients who respect themselves have more of an investment in their
future and in succeeding in recovery.
2. Prioritizing Aspects of Life That Require Change

Some people can make a lot of changes to their lives at once and be successful. However, most people
need to take major life changes one step at a time. Most clients need to prioritize their changes, first
making those that are most urgent. Overdue visits to the doctor and the dentist probably should come
before other lifestyle changes. Even before clients implement any changes, they already will have begun
to take control of their lives by prioritizing the changes they need to make. As clients begin to address
their health and grooming, the whole process of reclaiming their self-esteem gathers momentum. After
clients have visited a doctor for a checkup, they are more likely to eat right and exercise. When their diet
and fitness are under control, clients are more likely to pay attention to their clothes and hygiene.
The counselor might draw connections between the concerns raised in this session and those raised
in Session 15: Managing Life; Managing Money. The counselor should help clients see that staying
healthy, managing finances, paying attention to personal grooming, and attending to the responsibilities
of day-to-day living are part of the larger picture of recovery. As was noted in session 15, however, the
counselor should ensure that clients do not feel overwhelmed by this larger picture. They can address
one aspect of their lives at a time and gradually fill in the larger picture.
124

n Go over handout RP 17—Taking Care of Yourself.
n Make sure that clients understand that self-esteem can help support recovery.
n Ask clients how they felt about their self-esteem when they were using.
n Ask clients whether they feel more self-respect now that they are in treatment and abstaining
from substance use.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss the changes in his or her self-esteem from the period
of substance dependence to treatment and recovery.
n Ask clients to identify and discuss the areas of their lives that need particular attention.
n Have each client propose and share with the group a plan to address the most important area
in his or her life.

done the homework but to encourage clients to work on their recovery between sessions and to
share that work with the group.
Homework
Have clients write their plans for addressing the first thing they need to do to take better care of
themselves. Encourage them to be as detailed as possible.
125
Session 18: Emotional Triggers

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand how certain emotions can act as triggers.
n Help clients examine and understand their emotions.
n Help clients identify tools that will help them avoid emotions that can act as triggers.
Handout
n RP 18—Emotional Triggers

1. Learning To Look Out for Dangerous Emotional Triggers
Each client probably has emotional triggers that are unique to him or her. Feelings that might lead
to relapse for one client may not cause the same response in others. For example, some clients are
at greater risk of relapse when things are going well than when negative emotions arise. But some
emotions are dangerous triggers for most clients: loneliness, anger, and feeling deprived. If clients
are feeling these emotions, they should be aware that they are at a higher risk of relapse. Loneliness
arises because clients often feel isolated—they cannot hang out with using friends, and other friends
and family may not be ready to trust them again. Anger is a consequence of the frustrating struggle to
remain abstinent. Clients may begin to feel deprived because the life of partying with friends that they
left behind for abstinence and recovery begins to look appealing. These feelings of deprivation are a
signal that clients are very vulnerable to relapse.
2. Ensuring That Certain Emotions, if Encountered, Do Not Lead to Relapse

Like relapse justifications, some emotions may seem to lead automatically to substance abuse.
Clients need to understand their emotional responses and know which ones put them at increased
risk of relapse. As was discussed in Early Recovery Skills session 7, it is important for clients to be
able to separate emotions from behavior. The goal is for clients to examine their emotions in the
abstract so that they can experience a negative feeling without having it result in substance abuse.
In this way, clients’ rational minds, not their emotions, control their behavior.
3. Using Strategies for Understanding Emotions and Avoiding Relapse

One of the best ways for clients to gain a better understanding of their emotions and how they
respond to them is by writing about their feelings. Some clients already may be keeping a journal or
writing in a diary. Others may be new to the practice. For both groups, the process of writing about a
problem to understand it better can be beneficial. This is focused writing; clients should write with a
specific emotional question or issue in mind. The writing process itself, though, should be fluid. This
often is called free writing; the writer does not let punctuation, penmanship, or spelling stop the flow
of ideas. Clients do not need to write for a long time; they just need to write honestly and focus on the
question they decided to address. When they have finished writing, they should go back and read
what they have written, returning to it several more times in subsequent days.
126

n Go over handout RP 18—Emotional Triggers.
n Ask clients which emotions make them feel most vulnerable to relapse.
n Ask clients to recall times when one of these emotions seems to have caused a relapse.
n Ask clients whether they have experienced loneliness and anger and felt deprived since they
have been in treatment.
n Ask clients whether emotions have acted as triggers. If so, how did they respond?
n Have the recovering co-leader share how he or she became more aware of these “red flag”
emotions (e.g., loneliness, anger, feeling deprived). How did that awareness help the co-leader
avoid relapse?
n Ask clients whether they have kept a diary or a journal or written about their problems.
n Ask clients how this process has helped them.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experience with writing about emotional
problems as a way to avoid relapse.
n Ask clients what other strategies they have used to try to understand their emotions better.

Homework
Have clients set aside 15 minutes to write about an emotional problem that has been troubling them.
127
Session 19: Illness

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that becoming ill can be a relapse trigger.
n Help clients understand the importance of engaging in healthful behaviors.
n Help clients understand the importance of being responsible about recovery, even during illness.
Handout
n RP 19—Illness

1. Understanding That Fighting a Physical Illness Takes Energy and Focus Away From Recovery
Illness can be a major setback to recovery. Missing treatment sessions at the clinic and skipping
mutual-help meetings can let clients slip toward relapse. However, clients also should be aware that
sickness poses more subtle relapse risks. Early Recovery Skills session 8 (in which some clients
already may have participated) points out that people are vulnerable to relapse when they are tired.
(This concept should be familiar to clients who have attended 12-Step meetings.) Sickness saps the
physical and mental energy clients need to maintain abstinence.
2. Taking Responsibility for Preventing Illness and Maintaining Recovery

Clients should view staying healthy in the same way they view avoiding triggers. Doing their best not
to get sick should be regarded as an important goal in clients’ recovery, especially early in recovery.
The same behaviors that help ward off sickness also support recovery in general. Clients should be
sure to get enough sleep, eat healthful meals, exercise regularly, and minimize the stress in their
lives. They also should avoid activities that will leave them fatigued or prone to illness (e.g., excessive
work, elective surgery).
3. Keeping Recovery on Track Even During Periods of Illness

No matter how healthful a lifestyle clients lead, everyone gets sick at some point. It is important for
clients to recognize early on when they are getting sick so they can be on the alert for thoughts and
feelings that might lead to relapse. The unstructured time alone that is part of being sick can be a
trigger for some people. Being sick also can encourage relapse justifications. For example, clients
may think, I can’t stop myself from getting sick; it’s out of my control, just like my substance use. Or
clients might use because at a time when they do not feel good, they think substance use will help
them feel better. Clients also may slide into relapse because typical behavior is suspended when
people are sick. Without the structure of work and responsibilities, it is easier for clients to set aside
their commitment to remain abstinent.
Because illness can be a relapse trigger, clients should ensure that they get the rest and medical
attention they need to recover. If clients seek medical attention, they should be sure to inform the
128
doctor that they are in recovery so the doctor can take this into consideration if prescribing medication.
Clients should do all they can to minimize the amount of time they are ill. Getting healthy will allow
them to return to their regular recovery activities (e.g., attending treatment sessions, going to mutual-
help meetings, following their scheduled activities) more quickly.

n Go over handout RP 19—Illness.
n Ask whether any client has been sick since entering treatment. Was it hard to maintain
abstinence while sick?
n Ask clients what recovery activities they abandoned when they were sick. What effect did this
have on their recovery?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experiences with being sick during early recovery.
How did he or she remain abstinent when faced with diminished mental and physical energy?
n Ask clients to discuss their current approach to maintaining good health. Are they regularly
eating healthful meals? Are they exercising three or four times a week?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss the importance of diet and exercise to his or her recovery.
n Ask clients to plan for illness. Do they usually get sick during certain times of the year (e.g., flu in
the winter, allergies in the spring)? They should be thinking ahead and preparing for the times
when they are sick. What can they do to limit the amount of time they are sick? What can they
do to keep their focus on recovery, even if they are tired?

Homework
Have clients list the ways in which their lifestyles are unhealthful and measures they can take to live a
healthier life.
129
Session 20: Recognizing Stress

Goals of Session
n Help clients recognize signs of stress in their lives.
n Help clients understand the threat stress poses to recovery.
n Help clients identify strategies to cope with stress.
Handout
n RP 20—Recognizing Stress

1. Recognizing Signs of Stress
The prevalence of the term “stress” has tended to empty it of specific meaning; clients may equate
stress with worry, anxiety, nervousness, tension, or other similar words. Stress refers to an accumula-
tion of concerns that unbalances a person’s life. Stress represents an overload that throws people’s
lives out of equilibrium. People complain about stress so much that clients may assume it is a fact of
modern life about which they can do little. However, clients need to recognize the signs of stress and
minimize the effects that it has on their lives. Stress makes it harder for clients to remain abstinent and
focused on recovery. It is easy for people to become accustomed to a certain level of stress and not
even be aware of its presence until physical warning signs appear.
Clients should be on the alert for the following warning signs of stress:
n Irritability n Constant fatigue
n Difficulty communicating n Memory problems
n Sleep disturbances n Disorientation or confusion
n Headaches n Difficulty making decisions
n Weight loss or gain n Depression

n Tremors or muscle twitching n Apathy
n Gastrointestinal problems
These are the warning signs that clients may not be able to handle the level of stress in their lives.
Staying committed to recovery is more difficult when stress reaches high levels.
2. Understanding That Stress May Indicate That Clients Are Trying To Do Too Much
Stress can result when people place excessive demands on themselves. People in recovery often
want to try to live a perfect life or make up for the damage they have done when they were substance
dependent. They take on too much responsibility or too much work in too short a time, and their
recovery suffers. An example is an employee who often missed work because of substance abuse
130
now putting in a lot of overtime to compensate. Clients should be reminded that it is important to
balance the various aspects of their lives and that recovery needs to come first. If they are too busy
and are experiencing stress that could distract them from their recovery, they may need to back away
from some other obligations.
3. Coping With Stress

RP session 22 will address ways to help clients reduce stress in various areas of their lives. For now,
clients should know that many of the practices they explore in Early Recovery Skills and Relapse
Prevention sessions also will help reduce stress. Exercise is an excellent way to manage stress.
Scheduling activities helps impose order and exerts control over clients’ lives. Talking with supportive
friends and mentors (e.g., participating in mutual-help groups) helps manage stress levels. Being
aware of triggers and staying alert for relapse help keep recovery on track and help clients understand
themselves better. Being mindful of how one conducts one’s life is key to reducing stress.

n Go over handout RP 20—Recognizing Stress.

n Ask clients to discuss how they know they are experiencing stress in their lives. What physical or
emotional changes do they notice?
n Sometimes people are unaware of signs of stress that are obvious to others. Ask clients whether
they have noticed signs of stress in other group members.
n Ask clients whether they think there is an acceptable level of stress. Is some stress unavoidable
in today’s world?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experience of recognizing and coping with
stress during recovery.
n Ask clients how they coped with stress when they were abusing substances.
n Ask clients whether they are experiencing different types of stress now that they are in recovery.

131
Homework
Have clients list two sources of stress in their lives, the emotional or physical signs of stress, and the
danger the stress poses to their recovery.
132
Session 21: Relapse Justification II

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the processes by which relapse justifications lead to relapse.
n Help clients understand that moving closer to substance use is never a good idea.
n Help clients identify strategies to resist relapse justifications.
Handout
n RP 21—Relapse Justification II

1. Recognizing That Overconfidence in Personal Strength Is Dangerous
Often, after several weeks of abstinence, clients begin to feel that their substance dependence is
under control. This is called the Honeymoon—usually weeks 3 through 7 of recovery. (Clients who
have already participated in Early Recovery Skills session 5 will be familiar with this term and con-
cept.) Clients begin to have more energy during this time and may begin to feel more positive about
recovery. An optimistic approach to recovery is welcome, but it can prompt some clients to think their
substance dependence is “cured.”
Clients who feel that they are in control of their substance use disorder are vulnerable to relapse;
they may try to test the strength of their recovery by putting themselves in situations where drugs are
prevalent. They may go to a club or call up friends they formerly used with. Overconfident clients also
may decide that it is all right to try just a little bit of the substance they were dependent on, just to
prove to themselves that they have conquered their problem.
2. Remembering That for Recovery Being Smart Is Part of Being Strong

Although it is true that it requires personal strength to stop taking drugs and to remain abstinent,
clients cannot rely on this strength in all situations. Clients who try to test themselves as discussed
above are relying exclusively on their willpower rather than their intelligence. Some clients feel that
only by getting close to substance use and not using will they be able to gauge their recovery. But the
most important measurement in recovery is abstinence. Anything that moves clients closer to using and
farther from abstinence is a bad idea. Clients’ willpower might fail them, but sticking to a smart plan for
abstinence will help clients maintain their recovery.
3. Countering Relapse Justifications

Relapse justifications abound. Clients will be able to think of a lot of reasonable-sounding excuses
for why they should use again. No matter how clients try to rationalize using, the end point of all justifi-
cations is relapse, with the danger of a return to life driven by substance abuse.
133
A good way for clients to short circuit the connection between relapse justification and relapse is to
anticipate likely relapse situations and plan their responses. Each client knows best the relapse justifi-
cations to which he or she is susceptible and how his or her addicted brain has been successful in the
past. Some people might not be swayed at all by the temptation to hang out with old using friends or to
use drugs as part of a celebration. But the notion of drinking while watching a sporting event or testing
their willpower by trying a little of the drug on which they were dependent formerly might seem very
appealing. Clients need to be honest with themselves about their vulnerabilities and plan detailed
responses to specific relapse justifications.

n Go over handout RP 21—Relapse Justification II.

n This session is a continuation of RP session 16. If necessary, return to the description of session
16, and review what relapse justification is.
n Ask clients whether they have entered the Honeymoon stage of recovery. Do they feel as if they
have their substance use problem under control now? What are the inherent dangers in feeling
this way?
n Personal strength is part of recovery. But clients should rely on being smart, not strong, to main-
tain their recovery. Ask clients to discuss this idea. How much of their recovery is the result of
personal strength? How much is the result of being smart? How do clients balance being strong
with being smart?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her experiences with the relapse justifications
listed on the handout.
n Celebrations may pose particular challenges to recovery for many clients. Celebrations are
usually public events, and drinking or other substance use often is expected. Ask clients how
they plan to handle, for example, a toast at a wedding, when friends and strangers are encour-
aging them to take a drink.
n Have clients discuss specific strategies and responses they can use when confronted with
relapse justifications.

134
Homework
Have clients identify a relapse justification, write a description of a dangerous relapse situation, and
script a response that will help them avoid relapse. (Clients who have already participated in RP
session 16 should address a different scenario.)
135
Session 22: Reducing Stress

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that stress can affect recovery adversely.
n Help clients identify the aspects of their daily lives that are stressful.
n Help clients identify strategies to reduce stress.
Handout
n RP 22—Reducing Stress

1. Understanding the Risk Posed by Accumulation of Daily Stress
Clients who enter treatment have added major stressors to their lives. In addition to the stress of
stopping all substance use, clients must handle the demands that treatment places on their time, their
families, and their emotions. Faced with these imposing sources of stress, clients may be less attuned
to the accumulation of daily stress in their lives. A previous RP session (session 20) addressed ways
for clients to recognize signs of stress. It is important for clients to be alert to signs of stress so that
they can prevent a buildup of stressors that will put their recovery in jeopardy. Energy that is sapped
by coping with stress is energy that cannot be directed toward recovery.
2. Focusing on Signs of Stress

Clients should be encouraged to undertake a thorough examination of their lives, looking for signs
and sources of stress. They might approach this task as they would taking an inventory, checking
each aspect of their lives (e.g., family, work, friends) for stressors. Minimizing stress is important to
recovery. Clients should make this survey of stressors a regular practice.
When clients are experiencing stress, they need to find a way to relax. Often, physical activity helps
people minimize stress. Stretching, deep breathing, exercise, even a brief walk help defuse stress.
Clients need to explore various options for reducing stress, find out what works for them, and then
use that intervention when they feel stress.
3. Making Changes to Daily Life To Reduce Stress

It may help clients to have a few general strategies that they can apply to minimize stress in their lives:
n Moderation. One useful strategy is to do things in moderation; balance is always important

to a healthy, happy life, but never more so than during recovery. Clients need to ensure that
they do not experience large swings in physical energy from sleeping too much or not enough,
from overeating or eating infrequently, from exercising too much or not at all, or from ingesting
too much caffeine or sugar.
136
n Management. A second strategy that clients may find useful is planning ahead (scheduling)
and breaking down goals into small steps that can be tackled one at a time. This practice helps
clients assert control over their lives. The feeling that events in life are not under control can be
a major source of stress.

n Go over handout RP 22—Reducing Stress.
n Ask clients how they know when they are coping with a stressful situation. How does stress
manifest itself physically? Emotionally?
n Ask clients what long-term effects of stress they have observed in their lives.
n Ask clients about their techniques for relaxing when they are in a stressful situation. What
techniques work for them?
n Ask clients how they work to minimize the stress that enters their lives. Have they tried applying
the principles of moderation and management?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experiences coping with and minimizing stress.
n Ask clients whether they make it a habit to reflect quietly on their lives. This can be meditation,
prayer, writing in a diary, or just taking a few minutes before going to sleep. But it is important for
clients to think about their lives and calmly address the things that produce stress.

Homework
On each day between this session and the next RP session, have clients set aside a few minutes to
reflect on their lives, focusing on the factors that produce the most stress. Clients can use their journals
or pages 16 and 17 of their Client’s Treatment Companion to write about five ways they reduce stress.
137
Session 23: Managing Anger

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that anger can be an emotional trigger that leads to relapse.
n Help clients recognize when anger is building up.
n Help clients identify strategies to address anger positively.
Handout
n RP 23—Managing Anger

1. Understanding How Anger Can Lead to Relapse
For many people, substance use is a way to cope with feelings that are uncomfortable. When faced
with a troubling emotion, such as anger, people often choose not to cope with it and turn to substance
use instead. Clients in recovery no longer can turn to drugs and alcohol for a temporary escape from
difficult emotions. However, these emotions still act as triggers for substance use. Once clients are in
recovery, their refusal to come to terms with their troubling feelings can lead to relapse.
2. Recognizing How Anger Builds Up

People usually think of anger as a response to a person or an event. Someone makes a nasty remark
or cuts you off in traffic, and this causes you to be angry. However, anger is not caused by people or
events but is caused by how one thinks about them. If clients look for someone to blame when they
feel angry, they can end up feeling victimized. This can lead to a downward spiral in which the more
clients focus on being victims, the angrier they get.
3. Exploring Ways To Understand and Manage Anger

The following steps may help clients better understand and manage their anger:
n Be honest with yourself. Admit when you are experiencing anger.
n Be aware of how your anger shows itself. Physical sensations and patterns of
behavior can help you recognize when you are angry.
n Think about how anger affects others. Being aware of anger’s effects on those
you care about might motivate you to minimize its effects in your life.
n Identify and implement coping strategies. Keep using strategies that have always
worked, and find new ones that may be useful.
138

n Go over handout RP 23—Managing Anger.
n Ask clients to discuss times when they have felt victimized. How did they break out of the cycle
of anger and victimization?
n Ask clients to discuss the physical and behavioral clues that let them know they are angry. Why
is it important to be aware of anger?
n Ask clients about the advantages of speaking their mind when they are angry, as opposed to
bottling up their anger. What are the potential disadvantages to speaking up?
n Ask clients what it means when someone is passive–aggressive. What types of behaviors are
typical of this response? Why is this an unhealthy way to manage anger?
n Ask clients what strategies for coping with anger have worked for them in the past. What new
strategies might be helpful?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experiences with anger in recovery.

Homework
Have clients identify one new strategy for coping with anger and write the benefits of the strategy.
139
Session 24: Acceptance

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that accepting their substance use disorder is the first step in gaining
control of their lives.
n Help clients understand that accepting their substance use disorder is not a sign of weakness.
n Help clients identify sources of strength to draw on.
Handout
n RP 24—Acceptance

1. Accepting the Power of Substance Dependence
Clients confront a paradox when admitting and accepting the power of their substance use disorder.
Remaining abstinent and in recovery will require that clients be smart and strong. Before they can get
to the point where their recovery is underway, clients must admit that substance dependence is stronger
than they are and that it controls their lives. Even though it may seem counterintuitive to clients, espe-
cially those who have made attempts to stop using on their own without the benefit of treatment or
support groups, surrendering control is the first step to reclaiming control. Clients who have attended
12-Step meetings may be familiar with this idea because it constitutes the first of the 12 Steps.
2. Understanding That People Have Limits and That Some Things Are Beyond Their Control
It is normal for clients not to recognize the extent of their substance use disorder. Knowing that they
are substance dependent, in part, because their bodies now have a chemical need for drugs may help
some clients accept that their problem is beyond their control. In this sense, substance use disorders are
much like any other chronic medical disorder, such as diabetes or heart disease. There is no shame in
admitting the need for help, just as there is no shame in admitting the need for insulin by people who
have diabetes. This is not to say that their substance dependence is out of clients’ hands. Clients need
to take responsibility for their actions, but the first step in that process is admitting that they cannot stop
using substances on their own.
3. Identifying Sources of Support and Strength

Clients should be aware that admitting and accepting that they have a problem is not something they
do only once at the beginning of treatment. Even people who have been in recovery for months can
let down their guard and begin to think they are stronger than the substance dependence that brought
them to treatment in the first place. (In fact, clients who are several weeks into recovery often feel that
they are “cured.” This often happens during the Honeymoon stage of recovery, as discussed in Early
Recovery Skills session 5.)
Because acceptance can be an ongoing problem throughout recovery, clients need sources of strength
they can draw on to help them stay abstinent. The fellow members of 12-Step, mutual-help, or spiritually
140
oriented programs can be a strong support during recovery. Clients should find a meeting group they are
comfortable with and attend regularly. Friends and loved ones also can provide needed support.

n Go over handout RP 24—Acceptance.
n Ask clients to discuss their experiences with trying to stop using substances before they entered
treatment. Did they try to “just say no”? Were some clients practicing “white-knuckle sobriety,”
just hanging on for dear life?
n Ask clients whether they have accepted their substance dependence. How did their approach to
abstinence and recovery change once they accepted their problem?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss the negative effects of his or her substance use.
n Some clients may have heard that it is necessary to “hit bottom” before they can begin recovery.
Tell clients that studies indicate that “hitting bottom” is not correlated with success in recovery.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss the paradox of surrendering control to take back control
of his or her life. Have clients discuss this paradox as well.
n Introduce the idea that substance dependence can be thought of as a disorder just like other
chronic medical disorders. Discuss with clients whether this concept makes them feel less guilt
and shame.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share the supports and sources of strength that helped him
or her during early recovery. What sources of strength can clients draw on to help them stay
abstinent and in recovery?

Homework
Have clients make a list of at least three sources of strength and support on which they can draw
during recovery.
141
Session 25: Making New Friends

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the need to surround themselves with supportive, abstinent friends.
n Help clients learn how to determine whether people they meet will be appropriate friends.
n Help clients explore new places and ways to meet people and make friends.
Handout
n RP 25—Making New Friends

1. Understanding the Important Role Friends Play in Recovery
Sometimes when clients enter treatment, they expect to stop using substances but maintain old friend-
ships with people who still use. Clients who are serious about living a substance-free life will need to find
new friends who can be supportive of their recovery. Relationships with friends help shape individuals.
Being around people who are committed to recovery and people whose lives are balanced and fulfilling
has a positive effect on clients, especially those who are new to abstinence and recovery. Perhaps the
most important role friends can play for clients in recovery is to be a resource for support and strength.
However, clients also rely on friends for fun activities that are an important part of recovery.
2. Recognizing That Behavior Change May Be Necessary for Clients To Make New Friends
Friendships are built on common interests. Many clients entering treatment will have had friendships
that were based primarily on substance use. Some clients’ social skills for making new friends might
be rusty. Clients who are reluctant to seek out new friendships will gain confidence and self-assurance
as their recovery progresses. The counselor should remind clients that friendship is a two-way street.
In addition to looking for support from friends, clients can benefit from being a good friend to others in
recovery or to new people they meet.
3. Exploring New Places and Ways To Meet People and Make Friends
The counselor should encourage clients to attend 12-Step, mutual-help, or spiritually oriented meetings;
try to make abstinent friends; and find a sponsor. Clients also should be encouraged to resume old
hobbies or activities that they allowed to languish or explore new interests. Taking a class, joining a
club or a gym, and volunteering are good ways to meet people with whom clients can form meaningful
friendships. The counselor should remind clients that personal friendships and business dealings with
other clients in group are not recommended, especially early in recovery.

142
n Go over handout RP 25—Making New Friends.
n Ask clients whether they have friends from before they entered treatment who will be good
friends to keep now that they are in recovery. What qualities do these friends have?
n Ask clients how the friends they used substances with affected their lives.
n Ask clients whether they have spoken with friends with whom they used to use substances.
What have they talked about? Have clients severed these friendships? Tried to maintain them?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experience with friends during the transition
from using to recovery. Did any of the former friendships last?
n Ask clients how they met new people and made friends while they were abusing substances.
Will they be able to meet new nonusing friends in the same ways?
n Ask clients what qualities they look for in a good friend. What role do acquaintances play in
clients’ lives? How is this different from the role friends play?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss personal changes he or she made to find new friends
after entering treatment.
n Have clients discuss ways to meet new friends.

Homework
Have clients identify three things (other than attending 12-Step or mutual-help meetings) that will help
them meet new friends.
143
Session 26: Repairing Relationships

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the need to repair relationships by making amends.
n Help clients understand that making amends must go beyond stopping substance use.
n Help clients prepare to address people who refuse to forgive.
Handout
n RP 26—Repairing Relationships

1. Acknowledging Past Behaviors for Which Amends Should Be Made
As discussed in RP session 24, clients first must admit to themselves that they have a substance use
disorder and that it has control over their lives. Another aspect of recovery is clients’ acknowledgment
that they have hurt the people close to them because of their substance abuse. In addition to clients’
being honest with themselves about the hurt they have done to others, clients must rebuild the rela-
tionships that were broken as a result of their substance abuse. Clients who have attended 12-Step
meetings may be familiar with the process of acknowledging that amends must be made; this process
constitutes Step 8 of the 12 Steps.
2. Exploring Ways To Make Amends and Repair Relationships

Stopping substance use, entering treatment, and staying abstinent are difficult. Some clients may
feel that by accomplishing these things they have done enough work toward repairing their damaged
relationships. By themselves, these things are not sufficient. Clients must speak with the people they
have wronged, acknowledge the harm they caused, and explain that they have entered treatment and
are in recovery. For some people, clients’ taking responsibility for the harm they have caused will be
enough to repair past damage. Others may not be so quick to forgive. Clients may have to work with
the people they have hurt to restore relationships. As discussed in RP session 12, restoring trust can
be an arduous process.
3. Forgiving Oneself and Others

The damage done to relationships by substance use disorders is not a one-way street. Friends and
loved ones do hurtful things to the person who is abusing substances, too. Clients should be prepared
to forgive people who have hurt them, even if the people are not ready to acknowledge the hurt or
apologize for it. Clients should work to let go of grudges and resentment; bitterness is a dangerous
emotion (like anger) that can act as a trigger for relapse. To leave bitterness behind, clients must be
able to forgive themselves for their past behaviors. They cannot change the past; once they have
entered treatment, made amends, and resolved not to make the same mistakes again, clients have
done all they can do to address past mistakes.
144

Clients should be given time to complete the handout before the discussion begins. Clients should not be
forced to comply if they find it difficult or uncomfortable to complete the handout in the group. The handout
is primarily a tool for discussion. The counselor steers clients away from reading their responses and
encourages them to converse about the issues the handout raises. The counselor ensures that all clients
have an opportunity to participate.
n Go over handout RP 26—Repairing Relationships.
n Ask clients to whom they need to make amends.
n Ask clients what they need to make amends for.
n Ask clients to discuss the difference between apologizing and making amends.
n Ask clients how they plan to handle a situation where someone is still angry and refuses to
forgive them.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experience with going to people to make
amends. How did the co-leader handle people who refused to forgive and accept him or her?
n Ask clients how they are prepared to make amends. Beyond apologizing, what else might they
have to do to repair relationships?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share the various ways he or she went about making amends.

Homework
Have clients list one person to whom they need to make amends and the measures they will take to
repair the relationship. Clients can use their journals or pages 18 and 19 of their Client’s Treatment
Companion.
145
Session 27: Serenity Prayer

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the importance of distinguishing between things that can be changed
and those that cannot.
n Help clients understand that the Serenity Prayer is not strictly religious and is applicable in many
situations.
n Help clients identify things that they can change.
Handout
n RP 27—Serenity Prayer

1. Distinguishing Things That Can Be Changed From Those That Cannot
Making distinctions between what can be changed and what cannot is a critical skill for clients in recovery.
If clients are unsuccessful at making these distinctions, they can experience frustration, anger, and
increased stress that make them more vulnerable to relapse. Staying abstinent and progressing in recov-
ery demand clients’ full attention; clients do not have time or energy for worrying about things over which
they have no control. The counselor should take clients through some specific scenarios and have clients
discuss and evaluate whether they can change the situations and how they should respond. For example:
n A client is stuck in traffic and is late for an appointment.

n The grocery store is out of a key ingredient a client needs to make a special dish.
n A client’s boss reprimands him for being late to work.

n A client’s partner still does not trust her, even though she has been abstinent for months.
2. Understanding What Serenity Means in the Context of Recovery

The Serenity Prayer was popularized by Alcoholics Anonymous (AA). (A version of the 12 Steps,
adapted for people who are recovering from stimulant use, is available at www.crystalmeth.org.) Like
12-Step programs, the Serenity Prayer has specific religious overtones: the first word in the saying is
God. Prayer provides many people with inner calm, but the serenity that is beneficial to recovery can be
achieved through other means, such as meditation or journal writing. Clients who are not religious or do
not believe in God can benefit still from the principles in the Serenity Prayer. These clients can think of
the prayer as a poem or a wise saying. Every aspect of the Matrix method or 12-Step meetings may not
be useful to clients. The counselor should encourage clients to take what they can use and leave the
rest. In other words, clients should accept the wisdom of this saying even if its form is not to their liking.
3. Identifying Areas That Require Change

Achieving the inner peace mentioned in the Serenity Prayer requires not only the ability to set aside
those things that clients cannot change but also the commitment to work on those things that they can
146
change. The important aspects of clients’ lives are things that will support them in recovery. Relationships
with friends and family can be a powerful source of strength during recovery. Often, relationships can be
improved and are worth repairing. The counselor should help clients identify other areas of their lives that
are both important to recovery and capable of being changed.

n Go over handout RP 27—Serenity Prayer.
n Ask clients to discuss what this saying means to them.
n The name of this saying focuses on serenity, but courage and wisdom also are mentioned in the
saying. Ask clients how courage and wisdom are part of recovery. How do courage and wisdom
contribute to serenity?
n Ask clients whether they are troubled by the fact that, according to the saying, God provides
serenity. Can clients appreciate the saying even if they are not religious or do not believe in God?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her understanding of the Serenity Prayer. Did the
co-leader struggle with the religious aspects of the saying? Was the idea of a higher power
comforting and helpful?
n Have clients discuss the things in their lives that they cannot change. How do they identify
these things?
n Ask clients what things in their lives should be changed. What steps are they taking to make
those changes?

Homework
Ask clients to identify one thing about their lives that they can change and that would help strengthen
their recovery. Have clients list the steps they will take to make that change.
147
Session 28: Compulsive Behaviors

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand what compulsive behaviors are and how compulsive behaviors other
than substance abuse can affect recovery negatively.
n Help clients understand the dangers of abstinence violation syndrome.
n Help clients recognize and eliminate compulsive behaviors.
Handout
n RP 28—Compulsive Behaviors

1. Getting Life Under Control by Eliminating Compulsive Behaviors
The counselor should define “compulsive behaviors” as irrational or destructive actions people take in
response to irresistible impulses.
As clients used stimulants and became more dependent on them, what started out as a casual prac-
tice—something they did when they were at a party or with certain friends—progressed to compulsive
use. Now that clients are abstinent and in recovery, they may be replacing their compulsive stimulant
use with other compulsive behaviors. Signs of compulsion include overindulging in food, tobacco,
caffeinated sodas and coffee, sweets, exercise, work, and masturbation. Gambling, spending a lot of
money, and abusing drugs other than stimulants also may be compulsive behaviors. It is important for
clients to eliminate compulsive behaviors from their lives. As long as some aspect of their life is out of
control, it is easy for clients to slip back into the out-of-control use of stimulants.
Some clients may need help beyond the scope of substance abuse treatment to address compulsive
behaviors (e.g., eating disorders, gambling addictions). The counselor should be alert for clients who
need more help and refer them for additional treatment.
2. Understanding How Abstinence Violation Syndrome Can Derail Recovery

Clients can feel as if they are walking a narrow path when they are in recovery. For some clients, as long
as everything in their recovery goes according to plan, they are fine. But if they make even one small
misstep, they can feel that they have fallen off the recovery path. This pattern of thinking is called absti-
nence violation syndrome, and it is dangerous. By this strict logic, even a small slip-up is the equivalent
of using again. A client who skips his regular evening swim may end up relapsing because in his mind he
already has ruined his recovery. Clients need to understand that no one’s recovery happens “perfectly”;
making a mistake does not mean that all is lost and that using drugs again is inevitable.
3. Balancing Lifestyle Change With a Healthful and Successful Recovery

Clients may have different approaches to the goal of eliminating compulsive behaviors from their lives.
Some people find that it is easier to make sweeping changes all at once. They figure they already are
girding themselves to do something difficult, so they might as well tackle all their compulsive behaviors
148
at once. Other people need to make changes gradually, one or two at a time. For them, the thought of
trying to eliminate all their compulsive behaviors at once is overwhelming. Clients need to work toward
the goal of eliminating their compulsive behaviors in a way that is comfortable for them and allows them
to keep their lives and recovery in balance.

n Go over handout RP 28—Compulsive Behaviors.

n Ensure that clients understand what it means to act compulsively and what compulsive
behaviors are.
n Ask clients to discuss their compulsive behaviors. Did clients find themselves engaging in more
compulsive behaviors when they became abstinent?
n Ask clients what steps they have taken to eliminate compulsive behaviors. How much success
have they had? What approach are they using? Are they tackling all behaviors at once or one or
two at a time?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her experiences with abstinence violation syndrome.
n Small things go wrong during recovery. Ask clients to discuss their attitude toward small slip-ups.
Encourage clients to put small missteps in perspective. If they are overly rigid in their approach
to recovery, they may overreact—and relapse—because of a minor problem.
n Ask clients to discuss relapse prevention techniques they have learned about. If clients are new
to recovery, make sure they understand the necessity to avoid triggers, practice thought stop-
ping, and use scheduling.

Homework
Have clients choose one of the relapse prevention strategies on handout RP 28 that they think will
work best for them. Have them describe when and how they will put this strategy into action.
149
Session 29: Coping With Feelings and Depression

Goals of Session
n Help clients recognize and understand their emotional responses.
n Help clients recognize signs of depression.
n Help clients explore strategies for coping with emotions and depression.
Handout
n RP 29—Coping With Feelings and Depression

1. Understanding Emotional Patterns in Recovery
It is important for people in recovery to be able to recognize and understand their emotional responses.
Accustomed to experiencing emotions that make them uncomfortable (e.g., shame, anger, sadness),
some clients may have ceased to be honest with themselves about what they are feeling. Until clients
can label their feelings accurately, they cannot address feelings that may build up and cause problems.
Even if clients experience negative or painful emotions, it is important that they acknowledge these feel-
ings. The counselor should remind clients that there is nothing wrong with having these feelings; clients
still can choose not to act on emotions that trouble them.
Clients also can gain a better understanding of their feelings by looking for patterns in how they
respond to situations and to people. Are clients more susceptible to some feelings than others? Do
certain situations always make clients depressed? Do certain people always make clients angry?
2. Understanding the Importance of Identifying and Addressing Depression

People in recovery often experience bouts of depression. For some clients, this is just a normal part of
the recovery process. They become depressed right after becoming abstinent or several months into
recovery (during the period known as the Wall). If these clients stay abstinent and keep their recovery
on track, the depressive symptoms should abate. In other clients, however, stimulant use had masked
symptoms of a depressive disorder that is laid bare once they are abstinent. The counselor should be
alert for clients with symptoms of depression that do not improve and ensure that these clients receive
proper evaluation and treatment.
Counselors may find the following resources from the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services
Administration (SAMHSA) helpful:
n Treatment Improvement Protocol 42, Substance Abuse Treatment for Persons With Co-
Occurring Disorders (CSAT 2005a)
n SAMHSA’s Web site on Populations With Co-Occurring Substance Use and Mental Disorders
(www.samhsa.gov/Matrix/matrix_cooc.aspx)
n SAMHSA’s Co-Occurring Center for Excellence (coce.samhsa.gov)
150
3. Using Coping Strategies To Manage Emotions and Depression

Many of the best ways to address symptoms of depression coincide with strategies clients already
should be using to prevent relapse. It is especially important for clients to reach out to supportive
friends and family if they are feeling depressed. Talking to a counselor or a physician also is a good
idea. Activities that get clients out of the house and force them to interact with other people also are a
good way to cope with depression. Exercise can stabilize the body’s rhythms, allowing clients to return
to more regular patterns of eating and sleeping. Exercise also can help alleviate symptoms of depres-
sion that occur during the Wall.
However, when these steps do not help mitigate a client’s depression, the counselor should consider
whether the client is experiencing clinical depression and should be referred for more intensive treatment.
The counselor should follow up immediately with clients who are suspected of being clinically depressed.

n Go over handout RP 29—Coping With Feelings and Depression.
n Ask clients whether they are being honest with themselves about their feelings. Do they feel that
there are some feelings that are off-limits?
n Encourage clients to accept the emotions that they experience. If clients feel that some emotions
are off-limits, ask them why they feel this way.
n Ask clients whether they notice patterns in their feelings. Do they often feel angry? Sad? Bitter?
If so, what are these emotions in response to?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experiences with depressive episodes in recov-
ery. Did the depressive feelings abate after the Wall?
n Ask clients whether they have been through depressive episodes before. How do they recognize
them?
n Ask clients whether they feel depressed now. What symptoms are they experiencing?
n Ask clients to share strategies that have helped them cope with periods of depression.

151
Homework
Have clients write down three responses, other than the ones listed on the handout, that they can use
to combat depression.
152
Session 30: 12-Step and Mutual-Help Programs

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand how 12-Step and mutual-help programs can support recovery.
n Help clients realize the many benefits from 12-Step and mutual-help programs.
n Help clients understand the breadth of 12-Step and mutual-help programs available.
Handout
n RP 30—12-Step Programs

1. Understanding the Basics of 12-Step Groups (e.g., what meetings are like, how to find
a meeting)
Some clients will be familiar with AA and other 12-Step groups. The counselor should take time to walk
clients through the rudiments of 12-Step group participation. Professional substance abuse treatment
combined with 12-Step participation is one of the most effective interventions for substance dependence.
These components are very important to recovery; clients should be given every opportunity to under-
stand and become comfortable with 12-Step programs. Important points to cover include the following:
n Meeting format. Meetings are held throughout the day and evening and usually last 1 hour,
with time before and after for socializing. The counselor should provide clients with a list of local
meetings and contact information.
n Participant-specific meetings. Large communities may have special group meetings

(e.g., for doctors, lawyers, members of other professions, people with mental disorders; gender-
specific meetings; meetings based on participants’ sexual orientation). Some communities have
meetings especially for people in recovery from methamphetamine use. (See www.crystalmeth.org
to access a list of communities that have methamphetamine-specific meetings.)
n Types of meetings. The content of some meetings has a special focus:
w Speaker meetings feature a person in recovery telling his or her story of drug and alcohol
use and recovery.
w Topic meetings have a discussion on a specific topic such as fellowship, honesty, acceptance,
or patience. Everyone is given a chance to talk, but no one is forced.
w Step/Tradition meetings are special meetings where the 12 Steps and 12 Traditions are
discussed.
w Book study meetings focus on reading a chapter from the main text of the 12-Step group.
(For AA, this is the Big Book; for Narcotics Anonymous [NA], the Basic Text.) Book study
meetings often focus on someone’s experience or a recovery-related topic.
153
Clients should visit different meetings until they find a group they like. Not every aspect of a meeting
or a particular discussion will be useful. But clients should strive to find a group they can attend regu-
larly and try to learn something that will strengthen their recovery each time they go to a meeting.
2. Understanding the Social and Emotional Support Available Through 12-Step Attendance
Twelve-Step groups consist of people with the same problem working together to help one another.
The group process reminds clients that they are not alone and provides them the opportunity to make
abstinent friends and begin to build a support network. Clients can receive guidance and encouragement
from others who have been in recovery longer than they have.
3. Exploring Alternatives to 12-Step Programs

Twelve-Step programs such as AA, Cocaine Anonymous, and NA are the most prevalent groups avail-
able. But they may not be for everyone. Crystal Meth Anonymous is a 12-Step group that provides
fellowship and support for people in recovery from methamphetamine use (see www.crystalmeth.org).
recovery support in addition to 12-Step programs, such as mutual-help groups. (In small communities,
a 12-Step meeting may be clients’ only option.) Even groups that do not adhere to 12-Step principles
offer the fellowship and support that are crucial to recovery. The counselor may want to discuss the
alternatives to traditional 12-Step meetings listed on pages 33 and 34.
The counselor also may want to devote some time to describing the various support programs for
families of clients (e.g., Nar-Anon, Al-Anon, Alateen).

Clients should be given time to read the handout before the discussion begins. The handout is primarily
a tool for discussion. The counselor encourages clients to converse about the issues the handout
raises. The counselor ensures that all clients have an opportunity to participate.
n Go over handout RP 30—12-Step Programs.
n Take care to respect group members who are reluctant to attend 12-Step meetings; ensure that
they do not feel coerced to attend 12-Step meetings.
n Ask clients whether they have participated in 12-Step or any of the other groups mentioned
above. Ask clients who have participated to describe the ways in which attending meetings
helped them.
n Ask clients whether they attend any special-focus meetings that they find helpful.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss any reservations or difficulties that he or she had with
attending 12-Step meetings when first starting in recovery.
n Ask clients to discuss the spiritual dimensions of 12-Step meetings. Do they find comfort in the
notion of a higher power?
154
n Ask clients whether they are troubled by the references to a higher power in 12-Step meetings. If
so, how do they reconcile those objections with continued attendance?
n Ask clients whether they have attended mutual-help or spiritually oriented meetings. If so, ask
them to describe their experiences.

Homework
Have clients attend a 12-Step or mutual-help meeting and write down five benefits from the meeting.
155
Session 31: Looking Forward; Managing Downtime

Goals of Session
n Help clients appreciate the risks of boredom as a relapse trigger.
n Help clients understand the benefits of planning rewards and downtime.
n Help clients explore different ways to break the monotony of recovery.
Handout
n RP 31—Looking Forward; Managing Downtime

1. Understanding That Boredom Can Be a Relapse Trigger
It is normal for clients to feel bored, listless, and unexcited during recovery. This boredom may be
caused by chemical changes that are part of the brain’s healing. It also may be a function of the rigid
structure of recovery. Although the structure of recovery is necessary, the boredom that it can breed
acts as a relapse trigger for many clients; using was the way many clients filled their free time and
made their lives more interesting. In addition, clients who are bored may lack the mental energy to
maintain a smart and strong recovery. It is necessary for clients to fight through their feelings of
boredom to keep their recovery on track.
2. Understanding the Benefits of Breaking Recovery Into Manageable Chunks of Time

One way for clients to combat the routine nature of recovery is to plan little rewards for themselves
every couple of weeks. These rewards need not be large purchases or big events. In fact, it is better if
clients think of small things that they enjoy but that still constitute a special treat (e.g., eating a favorite
meal, buying a new CD, taking a day trip). The rewards should be things that clients can look forward
to and that will pull them through the dreary parts of recovery. It also is important that the rewards not
disrupt recovery. For example, leaving town for more than a few days would not be a good idea during
treatment. Clients can think of these rewards as extensions of the marking progress activity from the
Early Recovery Skills sessions. Both components are exercises in breaking the sameness of recovery
into smaller periods that are punctuated by rewards.
3. Exploring Ways To Enhance Recovery by Planning Activities and Structuring Downtime

In addition to occasional rewards such as rest and fun, clients may need more frequent breaks from the
predictability of the recovery routine. For most clients, relaxing from the stress of everyday life used to
involve substance use. Now that they are in recovery, many clients need to find new ways to unwind
or to cope with the stress of their lives. Physical activity is an excellent way for clients to relax. Exercise
is known to reduce stress levels. When clients exercise, they also boost their self-esteem and help ame-
liorate any remaining physical symptoms from stopping substance use. Exercise need not be vigorous—
just consistent; walking or bicycling several times a week is good exercise during recovery.
156
Activities that involve clients’ minds are important, too. Starting a new hobby or picking up an old
interest is an excellent way to fight boredom. Clients might consider taking lessons or classes; learn-
ing something new (e.g., how to play a musical instrument or speak another language) orients clients
toward the future. When clients become engaged in learning something or participating regularly in an
activity, they make a commitment that supports their recovery.

n Go over handout RP 31—Looking Forward; Managing Downtime.

n Ask clients whether they have been experiencing boredom and emotional tedium. To what do
they attribute these feelings?
n Ask clients what effect boredom has on their recovery. What do they do now to relieve daily
boredom?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss how he or she used the practice of building islands
(from handout RP 31) to stay engaged in the recovery process.
n Ask clients what activities they can use as rewards to combat the routine nature of treatment
and recovery.
n Ask clients how they know whether they need to relax. What physical or emotional signs tell
them that they need some downtime?
n Ask clients to describe hobbies and activities that they have found relaxing and satisfying.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her experience using activities to combat
boredom. To relieve stress, what does the co-leader do in place of substance use?

the followup on homework should be. The goal of asking is not to discover which clients have not done
the homework but to encourage clients to work on their recovery between sessions and to share that
work with the group.
Homework
Have clients explain in detail one of their islands and one of the activities or hobbies they are going
to pursue.
157
Session 32: One Day at a Time

Goals of Session
n Help clients avoid feeling overwhelmed by the past.
n Help clients understand that the past does not define the future.
n Help clients explore different strategies for focusing on the present.
Handout
n RP 32—One Day at a Time

1. Avoiding Defeatist and Fatalistic Ideas About the Past
When many clients enter treatment, their immediate past is characterized by failure. They can use little
in their histories to build their self-confidence. Little in their experience convinces them that they can
succeed in recovery. Paradoxically, once clients are in recovery, the process of clearing up problems
from the past often leaves them overwhelmed and unable to face the present or the future optimistically.
Negative feelings and a bleak outlook on the future add stress to clients’ lives and increase the chances
of relapse. The counselor needs to persuade clients that they are capable of making a break with their
past behavior. As evidence that this is possible, the counselor can point to the fact that clients made the
decision to enter treatment. They can build on this decision to make their future different from the past.
2. Understanding That the Future Is Determined by the Individual, Not by Past Behavior
Clients often feel that, because they have failed to stay abstinent in the past, they will fail to do so in
the future. Although it is true that people often repeat past behavior, they do so by choice, for the most
part. The mere fact that a client had quit using and then went back to stimulant use does not mean
that the same thing will happen again. Clients decide whether they will be abstinent. Taking a smart
approach to recovery helps clients succeed where before they did not.
The counselor should remind clients of the times in their lives when they decided to change their
behavior and succeeded. For example, perhaps some clients altered their diet or gave up cursing.
Most clients probably can identify some point in their lives when they made a decision to change their
behavior and stuck with it.
The counselor also should be aware that some clients come to treatment with serious psychological
problems other than substance use. These problems may be the result of significant trauma that has
scarred clients. If the counselor notices serious psychological problems in clients, the counselor
should refer the clients to a mental health professional for assessment.
3. Exploring Strategies To Keep Recovery on Track by Focusing on the Present

The phrase “One Day at a Time” comes from 12-Step programs and is useful for clients to bear in
mind. Twelve-Step and mutual-help programs teach clients a new way to structure their experience so
158
that they are focused more on their immediate reality. Clients should strive to be less concerned about
the past and less fretful about the future. The counselor might suggest exercise (especially repetitive
exercise like walking, running, or swimming), meditation, or journal writing, but clients will know better
than the counselor what practices and thoughts will help them focus more on the present.

n Go over handout RP 32—One Day at a Time.
n Ask clients whether they let thoughts from the past affect their current behavior. What kind of
thoughts about the past do they have?
n Ask clients whether they tend to focus on negative thoughts about the past. What positive
aspects of their past could clients recall instead?
n Ask clients whether fears about the future overwhelm them. What fears do clients have about
the future?
n Ask clients whether they find it hard to make changes in their lives. Can they point to a time
when they made a change in their lives and stuck with it?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to share his or her experiences of letting go of past worries and
future fears and focusing on the present.

Homework
Have clients describe one activity that will help them focus more on the present and put it into practice
before the next RP session.
159
Elective Session A: Client Status Review

Goals of Session
n Help clients see an overview of the many issues involved in their recovery.
n Help clients establish a pattern of regular self-review.
Handout
n RP Elective A—Client Status Review

1. Understanding That Recovery Is a Dynamic Process That Must Be Actively Managed
Recovery is a complicated process. Remaining abstinent is the most important part of recovery, but
there is much more to recovery. As clients are going through treatment, it is important for them to real-
ize that once the structure of daily group sessions is gone, they will need to manage the complicated
process of recovery on their own. From the beginning of the Matrix intervention, clients have been
encouraged to attend 12-Step or mutual-help meetings. By the time they leave treatment, all clients
should be attending meetings and benefiting from the structure and support meetings provide. Clients
also will have the support of their families, friends, and, for those who are in a 12-Step program, spon-
sors. But it will be up to clients to make daily decisions that influence their recovery and monitor how
they are doing in the various aspects of recovery. Successful relapse prevention requires regular, fre-
quent reviews of the broad spectrum of issues that are involved in recovery.
2. Using Members of the Group To Explore Ways To Improve Recovery

Clients should be encouraged to draw inspiration and take suggestions from other members of the
group. A client who has been successful in a certain aspect of recovery should talk about the success
so that the rest of the group can be encouraged and can use or adapt the client’s strategies and
approach. Clients should treat the group as a think tank of good ideas and approaches to recovery,
taking the best ideas and applying them to their lives.

n Go over handout RP Elective A—Client Status Review.
n Ask clients to assess honestly their progress in the aspects of recovery listed on the handout.
This type of self-review should become a regular part of clients’ lives because it will help them
remain abstinent.
160
n Ask clients whether they can discern patterns in their responses. Do some aspects of recovery
come more easily for them? Why?
n Ask clients to focus on the areas with which they are most satisfied. Have them share their ideas
on why they have been successful. Encourage each client to share at least one story of success
along with the approach that led to the success.
n Ask clients what they can do to improve the areas with which they were unsatisfied.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss how gleaning ideas and suggestions from other people
in recovery has helped his or her recovery.

Homework
Ask clients to write down one of the ideas from the group discussion that they think will help them
improve their recovery. Have them explain how they will implement this idea and how it will help them.
161
Elective Session B: Holidays and Recovery

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand that the added stress of holidays increases the risk of relapse.
n Help clients assess their level of holiday stress and identify ways to alleviate it.
Handout
n RP Elective B—Holidays and Recovery

1. Understanding That Holidays Pose Particular Risks for Recovering Individuals
The counselor should consider using this session before a major holiday. The weeks around Christmas
and New Year’s Day can be a particularly troublesome time, but the Fourth of July, Memorial Day, Labor
Day, and other holidays also feature celebrations and parties that put clients at increased risk of relapse.
Holidays come with increased stressors, such as hectic schedules, travel, and increased spending. In
addition, many people experience intense emotional swings during the holidays—either joyous or
depressed. In this environment, faced with increased triggers, clients find it easier to relapse.
2. Understanding the Importance of Scheduling and Planning To Avoid Triggers

Clients experience disruptions in the normal routine of recovery during holidays. They may be away from
home, find themselves with more unstructured time, and have difficulty going to meetings. As a holiday
nears, clients need to be aware of the added risks and make plans that will help them avoid triggers. If
clients have gotten away from the practice of scheduling their activities, they should reinstitute the prac-
tice as a holiday approaches. If clients know they will be out of town, they should make arrangements to
keep up the activities that have been preventing them from relapsing. This may mean locating a 12-Step
meeting in the town they are visiting, scheduling phone calls with their sponsor, being sure they can get
some exercise, or setting aside some time for meditation or journal writing.

n Go over handout RP Elective B—Holidays and Recovery.

n Ask clients whether holidays are stressful times for them. How can holidays affect their recovery?
n Ask clients whether they have tried to remain abstinent through holidays, for example Christmas
and New Year’s. What additional stressors did they face during holidays?
162
n New Year’s Eve can be an especially troubling holiday for people in recovery. People are
expected to be festive, to drink alcohol, and to assess the previous year—all of which can
be stressful for people in recovery. Ask clients how they plan to cope with the added stress of
New Year’s Eve this year.
n Ask clients about the specific risks posed by holidays.
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss his or her experience with planning and scheduling to
keep recovery on track during holidays.

Homework
Have clients select the holiday that is most stressful for them or think about the next holiday. Have
them write a plan for how they will avoid relapse during this time.
163
Elective Session C: Recreational Activities

Goals of Session
n Help clients understand the importance of introducing new activities into their lives.
n Help clients understand that new activities and old pursuits may not feel like fun right away.
Handout
n RP Elective C—Recreational Activities

1. Understanding the Role Activities and Hobbies Play in Recovery
Activities and hobbies are important during recovery for several reasons. Any interest clients take up
helps orient them toward the future. The whole notion of pursuing a hobby or an activity suggests that
clients are involved in a process that stretches out in front of them. In this way, the activities that
clients choose help them reengage in their lives and enhance their commitment to recovery.
Physical exercise helps the body and mind get over lingering effects of substance use, relieves stress,
and bolsters clients’ self-esteem. Taking a class, joining a club, or volunteering helps clients meet
people who share their interests and builds a repertoire of interests and activities that do not focus
on substance use.
2. Finding Activities That Are Stimulating and Engaging May Take Patience
As clients resume old activities or pick up new ones, they should not be surprised if the activities are
not rewarding immediately. Their motivation at the beginning of an activity should be to strengthen
their recovery. As they become involved in activities over time, clients will enjoy them more. The
counselor should encourage clients to look on recovery as a fresh opportunity. Now that they are not
spending time, energy, and money supporting their substance use, clients can explore and develop
interests that they have been putting off or that seemed beyond their reach.

n Go over handout RP Elective C—Recreational Activities.

n Ask clients what activities they would like to pursue now that they are abstinent and in recovery.
Clients should be encouraged to imagine and describe a lot of different activities, helping one
another think of fun and involving interests to pursue. It is important to note here that personal
164
friendships among clients in the group are not encouraged. The counselor may want to discourage
clients from making arrangements to pursue activities with people who have been abstinent for
less time than they have.
n Ask clients about former hobbies they used to enjoy. What were the benefits of those activities?
How did they enrich clients’ lives?
n Ask clients whether they have begun new activities or resumed old hobbies. How has their
recovery been affected?
n Ask clients whether they have begun exercising since entering treatment. How has their recovery
been affected?
n Ask the recovering co-leader to discuss the role that exercise, interests, and hobbies played in
his or her recovery. How has the co-leader used these activities to help him or her avoid triggers
and prevent relapse?

Homework
Have clients list five new activities they have pursued or want to pursue to help them avoid triggers
and prevent relapse. Clients can use their journals or pages 20 and 21 of their Client’s Treatment
Companion.
Handouts for Relapse Prevention Group Sessions

The handouts that follow are to be used by clients with the counselor’s guidance. The handouts will
help clients make the most of the 32 RP sessions.
165
RP 1 Alcohol
It is often difficult for people to stop drinking when they

enter treatment. Some reasons for this follow.
Triggers for alcohol use are everywhere. It is sometimes hard to do anything social
without facing people who are drinking. How can you get together with your
friends without drinking?
Many people use alcohol in response to internal triggers. Depression and anxiety
seem to go away when they have a drink. It’s difficult for people to realize that
sometimes the alcohol causes the depression. What moods and feelings make
you want to have a drink?
If a person is dependent on an illicit drug and uses alcohol less often, alcohol may not
be viewed as a problem until the person tries to stop drinking. What challenges have
you faced in stopping drinking since you entered treatment?
Alcohol affects the rational, thinking part of the brain. It is difficult to think reasonably
about a substance that makes thinking clearly more difficult. How does it feel to be
sober at a party and watch people drink and act stupidly?
Alcohol dulls the rational brain. Alcohol lowers people’s inhibitions and can make people
more sexually aggressive, less self-conscious, and more sociable. People who use
alcohol to decrease inhibitions and help them socialize may feel uncomfortable without it.
In what ways have you depended on alcohol? For sexual or social reasons?
1 of 2
RP 1 Alcohol
Many of us grow up using alcohol to mark special occasions.

It is hard to learn how to celebrate those times without drinking. What special
occasions did your family celebrate with alcohol?
How do you celebrate now?
In many families and social groups, drinking is a sign of strength or maturity. Drinking
often is seen as a way of being “one of the gang.” Do you feel less “with it” when
you are not drinking? If so, in what ways?
Drinking can become linked to certain activities. It can seem difficult during early
recovery to do those things without a beer or other drink (for example, eating certain
kinds of foods, going to sporting events). What activities seem to go with drinking
for you?
It is important to remember that everyone who stops drinking has these problems at
first. As you work through the difficult situations and spend more time sober, it does
get easier.
2 of 2
RP 2 Boredom
Often people who stop using drugs say life feels boring. Some reasons for this feeling
include the following:
l A structured, routine life feels different from a lifestyle built around

substance use.
l Brain chemical changes during recovery can make people feel

listless (or bored).
l People who use substances often have huge emotional swings

(high to low and back to high). Normal emotions can feel flat by
comparison.
People who have been abstinent a long time rarely complain of continual boredom.
The problem of boredom in recovery does improve. Meanwhile you should try some
different activities to help remedy the problem of boredom in recovery.
List five recreational activities you want to pursue.

1. ___________________________________________________________________
2. ___________________________________________________________________
3. ___________________________________________________________________
4. ___________________________________________________________________
5. ___________________________________________________________________
Have you started doing things that you enjoyed before using drugs? Have
you begun new activities that interest you? What are they?
1 of 2
RP 2 Boredom
Can you plan something to look forward to? What will you plan?
How long has it been since you’ve taken a vacation? A vacation doesn’t
have to involve travel—just time away from your regular routine. What kind
of break will you plan for yourself?
Here are some tips to reduce feelings of boredom:
l Recognize that a structured, routine life feels different from a

lifestyle built around substance use.
l Make sure you are scheduling activities. Forcing yourself to write

down daily activities helps you fit in more interesting experiences.
l Try not to become complacent in recovery. Do something that will

further your growth. Sometimes boredom results from not challeng-
ing yourself enough in your daily living.
Which of the suggestions listed above might work for you? It is important to try new
ways of fighting boredom. Boredom can be a trigger that moves you toward relapse.
2 of 2
RP 3A Avoiding Relapse Drift
How Relapse Happens

Relapse does not happen without warning, and it does not happen quickly. The grad-
ual movement from abstinence to relapse can be subtle and easily explained away or
denied. So a relapse often feels as if it happens suddenly. This slow movement away
from abstinence can be compared to a ship gradually drifting away from where it was
moored. The drifting movement can be so slow that you don’t even notice it.
Interrupting Relapse Drift

During recovery people do specific things that keep them abstinent. These activities
can be called “mooring lines.” People need to understand what they are doing to keep
themselves abstinent. They need to list these mooring lines in a specific way so they
are clear and measurable. These activities are the “ropes” that hold recovery in place
and prevent relapse drift from happening without being noticed.
Maintaining Recovery
Use the Mooring Lines Recovery Chart (RP 3B) to list and track the things that are
holding your recovery in place. Follow these guidelines when filling out the form:
l Identify four or five specific things that now are helping you stay
abstinent (for example, working out for 20 minutes, 3 times a week).
l Include items such as exercise, therapist and group appointments,

scheduling activities, 12-Step meetings, eating patterns.
l Do not list attitudes. They are not as easy to measure as behaviors.
l Note specific people or places that are known triggers and need to
be avoided during recovery.
1 of 2
RP 3A Avoiding Relapse Drift
You should complete your Mooring Lines Recovery Chart weekly. Place a checkmark
next to each mooring line that you know is secure and record the date. When two or
more items cannot be checked, it means that relapse drift is happening. Sometimes
events interfere with your mooring lines. Emergencies and illnesses cannot be con-
trolled. The mooring lines disappear. Many people relapse during these times. Use the
chart to recognize when you are more likely to relapse, and decide what to do to keep
this from happening. (After 5 weeks when the chart is full, transfer the list of mooring
lines to a journal or pages 12 and 13 of your Client’s Treatment Companion, and
continue to check your mooring lines.)
2 of 2
RP 3B Mooring Lines Recovery
Chart
You have learned new behaviors that keep you in recovery. These behaviors are the
mooring lines that keep your recovery steady and in place. It is important to chart the
new behaviors and check every week to make sure the lines are secure. Dropping
one or more of the mooring lines allows you to drift toward relapse.
Use the chart below to list activities that are important to your
continuing recovery. If there are specific people or things you
need to avoid, list those. Check your list each week to make
sure you are continuing to stay anchored in your recovery.
Mooring Line Behaviors Date Date Date Date Date
I Am Avoiding Date Date Date Date Date

RP 4 Work and
Recovery
Certain employment situations can
make treatment and recovery more
difficult. Some difficult situations are outlined below.
Employed in a Demanding Job That

Makes Treatment Difficult
Your treatment won’t work unless you give it 100 percent of your
effort. People in recovery need to find a way to balance work with treatment so they
can give recovery their full effort. Some jobs require long or unusual hours. Often the
very nature of the work schedule has contributed to the substance use problem. The
first task, if you have such a job, is to adjust your schedule to accommodate treat-
ment. Work with your counselor and your boss or representative from your employee
assistance program to do this. You also should find out whether flextime is an option.
Recovery needs to be the first priority while you are in treatment.
Working in an Unsatisfactory Job; Thinking of Making

a Change
During recovery major changes (in jobs, in relationships, etc.) should be delayed for 6
months to 1 year whenever possible. Reasons for this include the following:
l People in recovery go through big changes. Sometimes they

change their views on personal situations.
l Any change is stressful. Major stress should be avoided as much

as possible during recovery.
Working in a Situation Where Recovery Will Be Difficult

Some jobs lend themselves to recovery more than others. Work situations that are
difficult to combine with outpatient treatment include
1 of 2
RP 4 Work and Recovery
l Situations where it is necessary to be with other people who are

drinking or using
l Jobs in which large sums of cash are available at unpredictable times
People in these types of jobs may want to plan for a job change.
Unemployed and Needing To Find a Job

When people are out of work, treatment becomes more difficult
for the following reasons:
l Looking for work is often the first priority.
l Abundant free time is difficult to fill, and the structure

that makes outpatient treatment effective is lacking.
l Resources often are more limited, making transportation and child

care more of a problem.
If you are out of work and in treatment, remember that recovery still
needs to be your first priority. Make sure the counselor knows your
situation, and strive to balance job-seeking activities and treatment.
There are no easy solutions to these problems. It is important to be aware of the

issues so that you can plan to make your recovery as strong as possible.
2 of 2
RP 5 Guilt and Shame
Guilt is feeling bad about what you’ve done: “I am sorry I spent

so much time using drugs and not paying attention to my family.”
What are some things you have done in the past that you feel guilty about?
Feeling guilty can be a healthy reaction. It often means you have done something that
doesn’t agree with your values and morals. It is not unusual for people to do things
they feel guilty about. You can’t change the past. It is important to make peace with
yourself. Sometimes that means making amends for things you’ve said and done.
Remember the following:
l It’s all right to make mistakes.
l It’s all right to say, “I don’t know,” “I don’t care,” or “I don’t

understand.”
l You don’t have to explain yourself to anyone if you’re acting

responsibly.
Do you still feel guilty about the things you listed? What can you do to
improve the situation?
Shame is feeling bad about who you are: “I am hopeless and worthless.”
Do you feel ashamed of being dependent on substances? Yes ___ No ___
1 of 2
RP 5 Guilt and Shame
Do you feel you are weak because you couldn’t or can’t stop using?
Yes ___ No ___
Do you feel you are stupid because of what you have done?
Yes ___ No ___
Do you feel that you are a bad person because you are involved with
substance use? Yes ___ No ___
Recovery is always a hard process. No one knows why some people can stop using
substances once they enter treatment and decide to be abstinent and other people
struggle to maintain abstinence. Research shows that family histories, genes, and
individual physical differences in people play a role. Being dependent on drugs or
alcohol does not mean you are bad, stupid, or weak.
What we do know is that you cannot recover by
l Trying to use willpower l Trying to be good
l Trying to be strong
Two things to make recovery work are
l Being smart l Working hard
Everyone who is successful at recovery will tell you, “It was the hardest thing I ever
did.” No one can do it for you, and it will not happen to you.
2 of 2
RP 6 Staying Busy
Learning to schedule activities and structure your recovery is important in outpatient

treatment. Staying busy is important for several reasons.
Often relapses begin in the head of a person who has nothing to do and nowhere to
go. The addicted brain begins to think about past using, and the thoughts can start the
craving process. How has free time been a trigger for you?
How could you respond to prevent relapse if free time led to thoughts
of using?
Often people who abuse substances begin to isolate themselves. Being around people
is uncomfortable and annoying. Being alone results in fewer hassles. Did you isolate
yourself when you used? If so, how did this isolation affect your substance
abuse?
How does being alone now remind you of that experience?
1 of 2
RP 6 Staying Busy
Being involved with people and doing things keeps

life interesting. Living a substance-free life can
sometimes feel pretty tame. You begin to think
being abstinent is boring and using is exciting and
desirable. People have to work at finding ways to
make abstinence fun. What have you done
lately to have fun?
When people’s lives become consumed with substance use, many things they used to do
and people they used to do them with get left behind. Beginning to reconnect or to build a
life around substance-free activities and people is critical to a successful recovery. How
have you reconnected with old activities and friends? How have you built
new activities and brought new people into your life?
If you have not reconnected with old activities and friends or added some
new activities and people to your life, what are your plans to do so?
2 of 2
RP 7 Motivation for Recovery
Ask any group of people who are new to recovery why they want to stop using right
now and you will get many different answers:
l I was arrested, and it’s either this or jail.
l My wife says if I don’t stop, we are finished.
l Last time I used I thought I was going to die; I know I’ll die if
I use again.
l They are going to take the children from us unless we stop.
l I’ve been using for 20 years now; it’s time to change.
Which of the people quoted is most likely to be successful in recovery? It seems

logical to think that people who want to stop using for themselves and not because
someone else wants them to are more likely to do well in treatment. However, that
may not be true. Research shows that the reasons people stop using don’t predict
whether they will be able to lead substance-free lives.
What does make a difference is whether they can stay substance free long enough
to appreciate the benefits of a different lifestyle. When debts are not overwhelming,
relationships are rewarding, work is going well, and health is good, the person in
recovery wants to stay abstinent.
FEAR WILL GET PEOPLE INTO TREATMENT,

BUT FEAR ALONE IS NOT ENOUGH
TO KEEP THEM IN RECOVERY.
1 of 2
RP 7 Motivation for Recovery
List some of your reasons for entering treatment (for example, medical
problems, family pressure, job problems, depression).
List some of your reasons for continuing to work on your recovery today.
Do you feel that your reasons for initially stopping substance use are the
same as your reasons for staying abstinent today? Why or why not?
2 of 2
RP 8 Truthfulness
During Substance Dependence

Not being truthful is part of substance dependence. It is hard
to meet the demands of daily living (relationships, families,
jobs) and use substances regularly. As you become more
dependent on the substance, the activities that are necessary
to obtain, use, and recover from the substance take up more
of your life. It becomes more and more difficult to keep your life on track. People
who are substance dependent often find themselves doing and saying whatever is
necessary to avoid problems. Telling the truth is not important to them.
In what ways were you less than truthful when you were using substances?
During Recovery
Being honest with yourself and with others during the recovery process is critically
important. Sometimes being truthful is very difficult for the following reasons:
l You may not seem to be a nice person.
l Your counselor or group members may be unhappy with

your behavior.
l You may be embarrassed.
l Other people’s feelings may be hurt.
1 of 2
RP 8 Truthfulness
Being in treatment without being truthful may make everything you are doing a waste
of time.
How has truthfulness been difficult for you in recovery?
Being partly honest is not being truthful. Do you ever
Decide to let someone believe a partial truth? Yes ___ No ___
Tell people what they want to hear? Yes ___ No ___
Tell people what you wish were true? Yes ___ No ___
Tell less than the whole truth? Yes ___ No ___
ATTENDING GROUPS, ATTENDING MEETINGS, GOING TO A

HOSPITAL, AND GOING TO A COUNSELOR ARE WASTES OF TIME
AND MONEY WITHOUT TRUTHFULNESS.
RECOVERY FROM ADDICTION IS IMPOSSIBLE

WITHOUT TRUTHFULNESS.
2 of 2
RP 9 Total Abstinence
Have you ever found yourself saying any of the following?
l My problem is my meth use. Alcohol (or marijuana) is not a problem

for me.
l Having a beer or glass of wine is not really drinking.
l I drink only when I choose to. My drinking is not out of control.
l I don’t really care about alcohol. I drink only to be sociable.
If you entered the program to stop using stimulants, you may have wondered why
you were asked to sign an agreement stating your willingness also to stop using other
substances, including alcohol. For many reasons, total abstinence is a necessary goal
for people in recovery:
l Followup studies show that people who use stimulants are eight
times more likely to relapse if they use alcohol and three times
more likely to relapse if they use marijuana than people who do not
use these substances. You can reduce your chances of relapsing
greatly by maintaining total abstinence.
l Places and people associated with drinking often are the very
places and people who are triggers for substance use.
l When you’re learning to handle problems without taking stimulants,

using another drug or alcohol to numb the uncomfortable learning
process is harmful for two reasons. First, such use prevents you
from directly confronting your stimulant use problem. Second, it
puts you at risk of becoming dependent on alcohol or another sub-
stance while you try to overcome your dependence on stimulants.
Remember, if it’s more difficult to stop drinking than you expected, maybe you are
more dependent on alcohol than you think.
RP 10 Sex and Recovery
Intimate Sex
Intimate sex involves a significant other. The sex is a part of the relationship.
Sometimes the sexual feelings are warm and mellow. Sometimes they are wild and
passionate. But they result from and add to the feelings each partner has for the other.
Impulsive Sex
In this definition of impulsive sex, the partner is usually irrelevant; the person is a
vehicle for the high. Impulsive sex can take the form of excessive masturbation.
Impulsive sex can be used and abused in the same way drugs are used and abused.
It is possible to become addicted to impulsive sex.
What kind of experiences have you had with impulsive sex?
Is impulsive sex linked to your drug use? How?
Describe a healthy, intimate sexual relationship that you have had or hope
to have.
Impulsive sex is not part of a healthy recovery lifestyle. It can be the first step in the
relapse process. Like using alcohol or a drug other than stimulants, engaging in
impulsive sex can trigger a relapse and result in use of stimulants.
RP 11 Anticipating and
Preventing Relapse
Why Is Relapse Prevention Important?
Recovery is more than not using drugs and alcohol. The first step in treatment is stop-
ping drug and alcohol use. The next step is not starting again. This is very important.
The process for doing it is called relapse prevention.
What Is Relapse?
Relapse is going back to substance use and to all the behaviors and patterns that
come with it. Often the behaviors and patterns return before the substance use.
Learning to recognize the beginning of a relapse can help people in recovery stop
the process before they start using again.
1 of 3
Preventing Relapse
What Are Addictive Behaviors?
The things people do as part of abusing drugs or alcohol are called addictive behaviors.
Often these are things that addicted people do to get drugs or alcohol, to cover up
substance abuse, or as part of abusing. Lying, stealing, being unreliable, and acting
compulsively are types of addictive behaviors. When these behaviors reappear, people
in recovery should be alerted that relapse will soon follow if they do not intervene.
What are your addictive behaviors?
What Is Addictive Thinking?

Addictive thinking means having thoughts that make substance use seem OK.
(In 12-Step programs this is known as “stinking thinking.”) Some examples follow:
l I can handle just one drink.
l If they think I’m using, I might as well.
l I have worked hard. I need a break.
How have you tried to find excuses to use substances?
2 of 3
Preventing Relapse
What Is Emotional Buildup?
Feelings that don’t seem to go away and just keep getting
stronger cause emotional buildup. Sometimes the feelings seem
unbearable. Some feelings that can build are boredom, anxiety,
sexual frustration, irritability, and depression.
Have you experienced a buildup of any of these emotions?
The important step is to take action as soon as you recognize the danger signs.
Which actions might help you prevent relapse?
c Calling a counselor c Exercising
c Calling a friend c Talking to your spouse
c Taking a day off c Scheduling time more rigorously
c Talking to your family c Other: _________________________

_______________________________
Going to a 12-Step or outside
c _______________________________
mutual-help support meeting
3 of 3
RP 12 Trust
How has substance use affected the trust between you and people you
care about?
If you tell someone you’re not using and the person doesn’t believe you,
does it make you feel like using? Do you think, “If people are going to treat
me as if I’m using, I might as well use”?
People who are substance dependent find it difficult to have open, honest relation-
ships. Things are said and done that destroy trust and damage relationships.
Substance abuse becomes as important as or more important than other people.
When substance abuse stops, the trust does not return right away. To trust means to
feel certain you can rely on someone. People cannot be certain just because they
want to be. Trust can be lost in an instant, but it can be rebuilt only over time. Trust
will return gradually as the person who violated the trust gives another person reasons
to trust again. One or both people may want the trust to return sooner, but it takes
time for feelings to change.
How do you cope with suspicions about drug use?
What can you do to help the process of reestablishing trust?

RP 13 Be Smart, Not Strong
“I can be around drugs or alcohol. I’m sure I don’t want to use,

and once I make up my mind, I’m very strong.”
“I have been doing well, and I think it’s time to test myself to see
whether I can be around friends who are using. It’s just a matter
of willpower.”
“I can have a drink and not use. I never had a problem with
alcohol anyway.”
Staying abstinent has little to do with how strong you are. People who maintain absti-
nence do it by being smart. They know that the key to not drinking and not using is to
keep far away from situations in which they might use. If you are in an environment
where drugs might appear (for example, at a club or party) or with friends who are
drinking and using, your chances of using are much greater than if you weren’t in that
situation. Smart people stay abstinent by avoiding triggers and relapse situations.
DON’T COUNT ON BEING STRONG. BE SMART.
How smart are you being? Rate how well you are doing in avoiding relapse.
(Circle the appropriate number.)
Poor Fair Good Excellent

1. Practicing thought stopping 1 2 3 4
2. Scheduling 1 2 3 4
3. Keeping appointments 1 2 3 4
1 of 2
RP 13 Be Smart, Not Strong
Poor Fair Good Excellent

4. Avoiding triggers 1 2 3 4
5. Not using alcohol 1 2 3 4
6. Not using drugs 1 2 3 4
7. Avoiding people who use
drugs and alcohol 1 2 3 4
8. Avoiding places where you might
encounter drugs or alcohol 1 2 3 4
9. Exercising 1 2 3 4
10. Being truthful 1 2 3 4
11. Going to 12-Step or
mutual-help meetings 1 2 3 4
Add up the circled numbers. The higher your total, the better your
Recovery IQ. The best possible Recovery IQ is 44.
I scored ___________.
This is your Recovery IQ. What can you do to improve your Recovery IQ?
2 of 2
RP 14 Defining Spirituality
Look at these definitions of spirituality. Which ones

describe what spirituality means to you?
Spirituality is
1. A person’s relationship with God
2. The deepest level from which a human being operates
3. The philosophical context of a person’s life (values, rules,
attitudes, and views)
4. The same as religion
5. Other: __________________________________________________________
The second and third definitions describe spirituality in a broad sense. When it comes
to recovery, these broad definitions are the most useful way to think of spirituality.
They describe being spiritual as having to do with a person’s spirit or soul, as
distinguished from his or her physical being. Some people believe the level and
degree of spirituality in a person’s life help determine the quality of life. One way to
assess the quality of your spirituality is by answering the following questions:
What do you want from life? Are you getting it?
1 of 2
RP 14 Defining Spirituality
On what is your spiritual security based? (What would it take to destroy

your sense of self-worth?)
Who do you have to be before you approve of yourself? (What qualities are
most important to you?)
What does success mean to you? (What does “making it” mean?)
To live an abstinent life, the person in recovery has to be comfort-

able within himself or herself. Gaining a sense of spirituality gives many people the
inner peace that makes abusing substances unnecessary. Twelve-Step and mutual-
help programs provide one way to gain or regain a love of oneself and of life.
2 of 2
RP 15 Managing Life; Managing
Money
Managing Life
Maintaining a substance-dependent lifestyle takes a lot of time and energy. People
who are substance dependent give little time or thought to everyday responsibilities.
When recovery begins, long-neglected responsibilities come flooding back. It some-
times is overwhelming to think about all the things that need to be done. It also is frus-
trating and time consuming to catch up on so many responsibilities.
Determine how well you are managing your life by answering the following questions:
Do you have outstanding traffic tickets? _____

Have you filed all your tax returns to date? _____
Are there unpaid bills you need to make arrangements to pay? _____
What repair and maintenance does your house or apartment need?
Does your car need to be serviced or repaired? _____

Do you have adequate insurance? _____
Do you have a checking account or a way to manage your finances? _____
Are you handling daily living chores (for example, buying groceries, doing
laundry, cleaning)? _____
If you try to do all this at once, you may feel overwhelmed and hopeless. Take one
item each week and focus on clearing up one area at a time. Handling these issues
will help you regain control over your life.
The first item I need to take care of is:
I will start by:
The second item I need to take care of is:
I will start by:
1 of 2
RP 15 Managing Life; Managing
Money
Managing Money
Being in control of your finances is being in control of your life. When people who are
substance dependent are using, the out-of-control lifestyle often affects their finances.
How many of the following have been true for you?
_____ Any amount of money over __________ is a trigger to buy drugs.

_____ I have concealed money to buy drugs.
_____ I have large debts.
_____ I gamble with my money.
_____ I spend compulsively when I feel bad.
_____ I frequently argue about money with family members.
_____ I have stolen to get money to buy substances.
When they first enter treatment, some clients choose to give control of their money to
someone they trust. If you make that decision, you are controlling your finances and
asking the trusted person to act as your banker. Together with your counselor, you
should decide when you can handle money again safely. Then you can begin working
toward financial maturity. You may choose to have some of the following goals:
l Arrange to pay off large debts l Use bank accounts to help

in small, regular payments. you manage your money.
l Budget your money carefully, l Live within your means.
as you schedule your time.
l Make a savings plan.
l Arrange spending agree-
ments with anyone who
shares your finances.
What are your other financial goals?
2 of 2
RP 16 Relapse Justification I
Once a person decides not to use drugs anymore, how does he or she end up using
again? Do relapses happen completely by accident? Or are there warning signs and
ways to avoid relapse?
Relapse justification is a process that happens in people’s minds. A person may have
decided to stop using, but the person’s brain is still healing and still feels the need for
the substances. The addicted brain invents excuses that allow the person in recovery
to edge close enough to relapse situations that accidents can happen. You may
remember a time when you intended to stay substance free but you invented a
justification for using. Then, before you knew it, you had used again.
Use the questions below to help you identify justifications invented by your addicted
brain. Identifying and anticipating the justifications will help you interrupt the process.
Someone Else’s Fault

Does your addicted brain ever convince you that you have no choice but to use?
Does an unexpected situation catch you off guard? Have you ever said any of
the following to yourself?
l An old friend called, and we decided to get together.

l I had friends come for dinner, and they brought me
some wine.
l I was in a bar, and someone offered me a beer.
l Other:
Catastrophic Events
Is there one unlikely, major event that is the only reason you would
use? What might such an event be for you?
l My spouse left me. There’s no reason to stay clean.

l I just got injured. It’s ruined all of my plans. I might as well use.
1 of 2
RP 16 Relapse Justification I
l I just lost my job. Why not use?

l There was a death in the family. I can’t get through this without using.
l Other:
For a Specific Purpose

Has your addicted brain ever suggested that using drugs or alcohol is the
only way to accomplish something?
l I’m gaining weight and need stimulants to control my weight.

l I’m out of energy. I’ll function better if I use.
l I need drugs to meet people more easily.
l I can’t enjoy sex without using.
l Other:
Depression, Anger, Loneliness, and Fear

Does feeling depressed, angry, lonely, or afraid make using seem like
the answer?
l I’m depressed. What difference does it make whether I use?

l When I get mad enough, I can’t control what I do.
l I’m scared. I know if I use, the feeling will go away.
l If my partner thinks I’ve used, I might as well use.
l Other:
What might you do when your addicted brain suggests these excuses to
use?
2 of 2
RP 17 Taking Care of
Yourself
People who are substance dependent often do not take care of
themselves. They don’t have the time or energy to pay attention to
health and grooming. Health and personal appearance become less important than
substance use. Not caring for oneself is a major factor in losing self-esteem. To
esteem something means to see value in it, to acknowledge its importance.
People in recovery need to recognize their own value. In recovery, your own health
and appearance become more important as you care more for yourself. Taking care of
yourself is part of starting to like and respect yourself again.
Paying attention to the following concerns will strengthen your image of yourself as a
person who is healthy, abstinent, and recovering:
l Have you seen a doctor for a l Do you wear the same

checkup? clothes you wore when you
were using?
l When was the last time you
went to the dentist? l Do you need to have your
vision or hearing checked?
l Have you considered getting
a new look? l Do you exercise regularly?
l Are you paying attention to l Is your caffeine or nicotine

what you are eating? intake out of control?
Some people find it is easier to make sweeping lifestyle changes all at once. However,
if addressing all these health and grooming issues at once is too overwhelming, work
on one or two items each week. Decide which are the most important, and do those
first. As you look and feel better, you will increase both the strength and the pleasure
of your recovery.
The first thing I need to do to take care of myself is:

RP 18 Emotional Triggers
Trigger
Use
Thought
Craving
For many people certain emotional states are directly connected
to substance use, almost as if the emotion causes the substance use. It seems to
people in recovery that if they could avoid ever feeling those emotions (for example,
loneliness, anger, feeling deprived), they would never relapse. These emotional
triggers should act as warnings or “red flags” for clients.
The most common negative emotional triggers are the following:
Loneliness: It is difficult to give up friends and activities that are part of a substance-
using lifestyle. Being separated from friends and family leaves people feeling lonely.
Often friends and family members who do not use are not ready to risk getting back
into a relationship that didn’t work earlier. The person in recovery is stranded between
groups of friends. The feeling of loneliness can drive the person back toward using.
Anger: The intense irritability experienced in the early stages of recovery can result in
floods of anger that act as instant triggers. A person in that frame of mind is only a few
steps from substance use. Once a person uses, it can be a long trip back to a rational
state of mind.
Feeling Deprived: Maintaining abstinence is a real accomplishment. Usually people

in recovery feel justifiably good and proud about what they have been able to achieve.
Sometimes people in recovery feel as if they have to give up good times and good
things. Recovery seems like a jail sentence, something to be endured. This reverses
the actual state of recovery: substance use begins to look good and recovery seems
bad. This upside-down situation quickly leads to relapse.
It is important to be aware of these red flag emotions. Allowing yourself to be flooded with
these powerful negative emotions is allowing yourself to be swept rapidly toward relapse.
Have some of these emotional states been a trigger for you in the past?
Which ones?
1 of 2
RP 18 Emotional Triggers
Are there other negative emotional states that are dangerous for you?
What are they?
One of the goals during the recovery process is learning to separate thoughts,
behaviors, and emotions so that you can control what you think and how you behave.
It is important to recognize and understand your emotions so that your actions are not
always dictated by your feelings.
Many people find that writing about their feelings is a good way to recognize and
understand their emotions. You don’t need to be a good writer to use this tool. People
who do not like to write and who have never written much in the past still can learn
valuable things about themselves by putting their feelings into words. Follow the sim-
ple instructions, and try a new way of getting to know yourself:
1. Find a private, comfortable, quiet place and a time just for writing. Try to write
each day, even if you can write only for a few minutes.
2. Begin by taking several deep breaths and relaxing.
3. Write in a response to a question that you have asked yourself about your
feelings (for example, “What am I feeling right now?” “Why am I angry?”
“Why am I sad?”).
4. Forget spelling and punctuation; just let the words flow.
Writing about your feelings makes them clearer to you. It also can help you avoid the
emotional buildup that often leads to relapse.
2 of 2
RP 19 Illness
Getting sick often predicts a relapse. This might seem strange, even unfair. After all,
you can’t really do anything about getting sick, right? Many people get a few colds a
year. Although you may not be able to prevent yourself from getting sick, you can be
aware of the added relapse risk that comes with illness, and you can take precautions
to avoid getting sick.
Sickness as Relapse Justification

Illness can be a powerful relapse justification. When you are sick, you make a lot of
exceptions to your regular routine. You stay home from work; you sleep more than
usual; you eat different foods. You may feel justified in pampering yourself (for example,
“I’m sick, so it’s OK if I watch TV and lie around most of the day”; “I don’t feel good—
I deserve a few extra cookies”). Because people feel that getting sick is out of their
control, it seems OK to take a break from their regular behaviors. You need to be
careful that, while you are taking a break from other routines, you don’t allow sickness
to be an excuse for using.
Relapse Risks During Illness

When you are sick, you are physically weaker. You also may have less mental energy
to maintain your recovery. In addition to lacking the energy to fight your substance use
disorder, you may face the following relapse risks when you are sick:
l Missing treatment sessions
l Missing mutual-help meetings
l Not exercising
The following relapse risks also can act as triggers when you’re sick:
l Spending a lot of time alone
1 of 2
RP 19 Illness
l Recovering in bed (which reminds some people of recovering from using)
l Having a lot of unstructured time
Healthful Behaviors
Although you can’t always prevent yourself from getting sick, you can do things to
minimize your chances of getting sick. The following behaviors help support your
recovery in general and help keep you healthy:
l Exercise regularly (even when you feel as if you’re

getting sick, light exercise can be good for you).
l Eat healthful meals.
l Get adequate sleep.
l Minimize stress.
Early in recovery from substance use, you also should avoid activities that put your
health at risk or require recovery time. Elective surgery, serious dental work, and
extended exertion may leave you fatigued and make you susceptible to illness.
Recognize When You’re at Risk

Because you may be more likely to relapse when you’re sick, you should be alert for
the signs of illness. Soreness, tiredness, headaches, congestion, or a scratchy throat
can signal the onset of illness. Even something like premenstrual syndrome (PMS)
can weaken you physically and make relapse more likely.
If you do get sick, try to keep the negative effects of illness from interfering with your
recovery by getting well as quickly as possible. Get proper rest and medical attention
so that you can return to your regular recovery routine as soon as possible. You will
feel stronger, and your recovery will be stronger.
2 of 2
RP 20 Recognizing Stress
Stress is a physical and emotional response to difficult

or upsetting events, particularly those that continue
for a long time.
Stress is the experience people have when

the demands they make on themselves or
those placed on them disrupt their lives.
Sometimes we are unaware of this emotional state until the stress produces physical
symptoms. Place a checkmark next to any of the following problems you
have experienced in the past 30 days:
Sleep problems (for example, difficulty falling asleep, waking up

c
off and on during the night, nightmares, waking up early and
being unable to fall back to sleep)
c Headaches c Irritability
c Stomach problems c Difficulty concentrating
c Chronic illness c General dissatisfaction with life
c Fatigue c Feeling overwhelmed
c Moodiness
If you checked two or more of these items, you may need to make some
changes in your life to reduce the level of stress. Becoming more aware
of stress is the first step to reducing it. You may have been accustomed to
turning to substance use in times of stress. Learning new ways to cope
with stress is part of the recovery process. Another Relapse Prevention session will
address techniques for reducing stress.
RP 21 Relapse Justification II
Once a person decides not to use drugs anymore, how does that person end up using
again? Do relapses happen completely by accident? Or are there warning signs and
ways to avoid relapse?
Relapse justification is a process that happens in people’s minds. A person may have
decided to stop using, but the person’s brain is still healing and still feels the need for
the substances. The addicted brain invents excuses that allow the person in recovery
to edge close enough to relapse situations that accidents can happen. You may
remember a time when you intended to stay drug free but you invented a justification
for using, and before you knew it, you had used again.
Understanding and anticipating the justifications help you interrupt the process. Use
the questions below to help you identify justifications you might be susceptible to.
Substance Dependence Is Cured

Has your addicted brain ever convinced you that you could use just once or
use just a little? For example, have you said any of the following?
l I’m back in control. I’ll be able to stop when I want to.
l I’ve learned my lesson. I’ll only use small amounts and only once
in a while.
l This substance was not my problem—stimulants were. So I can

use this and not relapse.
l Other:
1 of 2
RP 21 Relapse Justification II
Testing Yourself
It’s very easy to forget that being smart, not being strong, is the key to staying abstinent.
Have you ever wanted to prove you could be stronger than drugs? For
example, have you said any of the following?
l I’m strong enough to be around it now.

l I want to see whether I can say “No” to drinking and using.
l I want to see whether I can be around my old friends.
l I want to see how the high feels now that I’ve stopped using.
l Other:
Celebrating
You may be encouraged by other people or your addicted brain to make an exception
to your abstinence. Have you ever tried to justify using with the following
thoughts?
l I’m feeling really good. One time won’t hurt.

l I’m on vacation. I’ll go back to not using when I get home.
l I’m doing so well. Things are going great. I owe myself a reward.
l This is such a special event that I want to celebrate.
l Other:
What might you do when confronted with these excuses to use?
2 of 2
RP 22 Reducing Stress
Answering the following questions as honestly as possible will help you identify which
parts of your daily living are most stressful. Take steps to correct these problems, and
you will reduce stress in your life.
1. In deciding how to spend your time, energy, and money, you determine the
direction of your life. Are you investing them in work and hobbies that you find
rewarding? Yes ___ No ___ If not, how might you change this?
2. Focusing on the present means giving your attention to the task at hand without
past and future fears crippling you. Are you usually able to stay in the here and
now? Yes ___ No ___ If not, what prevents you from focusing on the
present? How can you change the situation?
3. Do you take time each day to do something relaxing (for example, play-
ing with your children, taking a walk, reading a book, listening to music)?
Yes ___ No ___ If not, what relaxing activity will you add to your day?
4. Are you challenging yourself to do things that increase self-confidence? Yes __

No ___ If not, what changes could you make to boost your self-confidence?
5. Do you tackle large goals by breaking them into smaller, more manageable
tasks? Yes ___ No ___ If not, how do you think breaking goals into smaller
steps would help you manage stress?
1 of 2
RP 22 Reducing Stress
6. Are you careful to make your environment (home, work-

place) peaceful, whenever possible? Yes ___ No ___ If
not, how can you make your environment more peaceful?
7. Can you and do you say “No” when that is how you feel? Yes ___ No ___
If not, how do you think saying “No” could help you cope with stress in
your life?
8. Do you know how to use self-relaxation techniques to relax your body?

Yes ___ No ___ If not, what can you do to learn more about ways to relax?
9. Are you careful to avoid large swings in body energy caused by taking in
excess sugar and caffeine? Yes ___ No ___ If not, what changes can you
make to limit your intake of sugar and caffeine?
10. Are there specific ways you cope with anger to get it out of your
system? Yes ___ No ___ If not, how would reducing anger help you
manage stress?
11. What techniques can you start using that will help you get rid of anger?
2 of 2
RP 23 Managing Anger
Anger is an emotion that leads many people to relapse. This is

particularly true early in treatment. Frequently, anger slowly builds
on itself as you constantly think about things that make you angry.
Sometimes it seems that the issue causing the anger is the only important thing in life.
Often a sense of victimization accompanies the anger. Do the following questions

seem familiar to you?
l Why do I get all the bad l Why won’t he just do what I
breaks? want him to do?
l How come she doesn’t
understand my needs?
How do you recognize when you are angry? Does your behavior change?
Do you notice physical changes (for example, pacing, clenching your jaw,
feeling restless or “keyed up”)?
How do you express anger? Do you hold it in and eventually explode?

Do you become sarcastic and passive–aggressive?
What positive ways do you know to cope with anger?
Here are some alternative ways to cope with anger. Which of the following will
work for you?
l Talk to the person you are angry with.

l Talk to a counselor, a 12-Step sponsor, or another person who
can give you guidance.
l Talk about the anger in an outside support group meeting.
l Write about your feelings of anger.
l Exercise.
l Other:
RP 24 Acceptance
“Just say no” is good advice to stop people from trying drugs.
But it does not help people who are substance dependent. Overcoming substance
dependence requires that you recognize its power and accept the personal limitations
that occur because of it. Many people accept the hold that substance dependence has
over them when they enter treatment. But entering treatment is the first act of accept-
ance. It cannot be the only one. Recovery is an ongoing process of accepting that
substance dependence is more powerful than you are.
Accepting that dependence on drugs has power over you means accepting that
human beings have limits. Refusal to accept a substance use disorder is one of the
biggest problems in staying drug free. This refusal to give in to treatment can lead to
what is called “white-knuckle abstinence”—hanging on to abstinence desperately
because you isolate yourself and refuse to accept help. Admitting that you have a
problem and seeking help are not weaknesses. Does getting treatment for diabetes or
a heart condition mean you are a weak-willed person?
Accepting the idea that you have a substance use disorder does not mean you cannot
control your life. It means there are some things you cannot control. One of them is
the use of drugs. If you continue to struggle with trying to control the disorder, you end
up giving it more power.
There is a paradox in the recovery process. People who accept the reality of substance
dependence to the greatest degree benefit the most in recovery. Those who do not
fight with the idea that they have a substance use disorder are the ones who ultimate-
ly are most successful in recovery. The only way to win this fight is to surrender. The
only way to be successful in recovery and get control of your problem is first to admit
that it has control over you.
YOU DO NOT NEED TO “HIT BOTTOM” TO BEGIN RECOVERY.
I have a substance use disorder. Yes____ No____
I hope someday I can use again. Yes____ No____
I need to work on acceptance of

RP 25 Making New
Friends
A blessed thing it is for any person to have a friend:
One human soul whom we can trust utterly, who knows the best and
worst of us, and who loves us in spite of our faults.
Anonymous
Relationships are very important to the recovery process. Friends and family can offer
strength and help us understand who we are. The relationships you establish can support
or weaken recovery. It has been said, “You will become like those people with whom you
spend your time.” Use the following questions to help you think about your friendships.
Do you have any friends like the one described in the poem above? If yes,
who are they?
Have you become like the people around you? In what ways?
What is the difference between a friend and an acquaintance?
Where can you make some new acquaintances who might become friends?
To whom are you a friend?
What behaviors do you need to change to be better able to have honest

relationships?
RP 26 Repairing
Relationships
Friends and family of people who are substance dependent often get hurt as a result
of the substance abuse. People who are substance dependent often cannot take care
of themselves and certainly cannot take care of others.
As part of your recovery, you should think about whom you have hurt. You should also
think about whether you need to do anything to repair the relationships that are most
important to you. In 12-Step programs this process is called “making amends.”
What are some of the past behaviors you might want to amend?
Are there things you neglected to do or say when you were using that
should be addressed now?
How are you planning to make amends?
Do you feel that being in recovery and stopping the use of drugs is enough?
Making amends does not have to be complicated. Acknowledging the hurt you caused
while you were using substances will probably help reduce conflict in your relation-
ships. Not everyone will be ready to forgive you, but an important part of this process
is beginning to forgive yourself. Another aspect of repairing relationships involves your
forgiving others for things that they did when you were using substances.
Whom do you need to forgive?
What resentments do you need to let go of?

RP 27 Serenity Prayer
God grant me the serenity to accept the things

I cannot change,
The courage
to change the things I can,
And the wisdom
to know the difference.
What does this saying mean to you?
How can you find meaning in this saying, even if you are not religious or
don’t believe in God?
What parts of your life or yourself do you know you cannot change?
What have you changed already?
What parts of your life or yourself do you need to change?

RP 28 Compulsive Behaviors
Many people who are substance dependent enter treatment just to stop using a certain
drug. They do not intend to change their lives entirely. When they enter treatment,
they are told that recovery requires making other changes in the way they live. The
lifestyle changes put people in recovery back in control of their lives.
In what ways was your life out of control before you entered treatment?
Have you noticed yourself behaving excessively in any of the following ways?
l Working all the time l Eating foods high in sugar
l Abusing prescription l Exercising to the extreme
medications l Masturbating compulsively
l Using illicit drugs other than the l Gambling
one you entered treatment for
l Spending too much money
l Drinking a lot of caffeinated
sodas or coffee l Other:
l Smoking
What changes have you tried to make so far?
Does the following sound familiar? “I stopped smoking and using drugs. It was hard.
Then one day I gave in and had a cigarette. I felt so bad that I had messed up, I
ended up using.” This pattern is called the “abstinence violation syndrome.” Once you
compromise one part of your recovery, it becomes easier to slide into relapse.
1 of 3
Do you have a similar story from the past? What event led to your relapse?
What major lifestyle changes are you making in recovery?
Is it uncomfortable for you to make these changes? Yes ___ No ___

Are you avoiding being uncomfortable by switching to other compulsive
behaviors? If so, what are they?
Are there changes you still need to make? If so, what are they?
Relapse and Sex

Like substance use, high-risk sex is controlled by a trigger process. (High-risk sex
includes sex with a stranger, unprotected sex, and trading sex for drugs.) Triggers lead
to thoughts of sex. Thoughts of sex lead to arousal and action. For many people, high-
risk sex is associated with substance use. High-risk sex can be a trigger for substance
use. Engaging in high-risk sex can bring on a relapse to substance use.
What are some of your triggers for substance use?
What are some of your triggers for high-risk sex?
Have you experienced a relapse when sex was a trigger to use?
Prevention
Once you are aware of the things that are triggers for you, you can take steps to
prevent a relapse. Here are some suggestions you can do to prevent a relapse:
2 of 3
l Prevent exposure to triggers. Stay away from people, places,

and activities that you associate with drug use.
l Stop the thoughts that may lead to relapse. Many techniques

can be used to do this. Some examples of thought-stopping tech-
niques are the following:
’ Relaxation—Take three slow, deep breaths.
’ Snapping—Wear a rubberband loosely on your wrist

and every time you become aware of a triggering thought, snap
the rubberband and mentally say, “No!” to the thought.
’ Visualization—Imagine an ON/OFF switch in your head. Turn it

to OFF to stop the triggering thoughts.
l Schedule your time. Structure your day and fill blocks of free time
with activities. You can exercise, do volunteer work, or spend time
with friends who do not use drugs.
l Break your typical pattern. Take a trip out of town. Go to a

movie or watch a video. Go out to eat. Go to a 12-Step or mutual-
help meeting at a time you normally would be doing something else.
What are some other things you could do to prevent a relapse?
What do you plan to do next time you’re aware of being in a relapse situation?
3 of 3
RP 29 Coping With Feelings
and Depression
Feelings
Can You Recognize Your Feelings?
Sometimes people don’t allow themselves to have certain emotions (for example, you
tell yourself, “Feeling angry is not all right”). Sometimes people aren’t honest with
themselves about their emotions (for example, saying, “I’m just having a bad day,”
when the truth is they’re sad). When you mislabel emotions or deny them, you cannot
address them and they build up inside you.
Are You Aware of Physical Signs of Certain Feelings?

Maybe you get an upset stomach when you are anxious, bite your fingernails when
you are stressed, or shake when you are angry. Think about the emotions that trouble
you, and try to identify how they show physically.
How Do You Cope With Your Feelings Now?

How do you respond when you experience negative emotions? How do your feelings
affect you and others around you? For instance, do your feelings interfere with your rela-
tionships with others? Do people avoid you, try to keep you from getting upset, or try to
make you feel better? Focus on one or two emotions you need to cope with better.
How Do You Express Your Emotions?

It is important to find an appropriate way to express emotions. You can express feelings
indirectly (to a trusted group, friend, or counselor), or you can express feelings directly to
others about whom you have the feelings. You need to learn in which situations it is
appropriate to express feelings directly. You also can change your thinking in ways that
result in your feeling different. For example, instead of saying, “I am so angry she
doesn’t agree with me, I feel like using,” you can frame your feelings as, “It’s all right
for someone not to agree with me, and using will not make anything better.”
Do not let out-of-control feelings drive you back to using. Learning to cope with
emotions means allowing yourself to feel and balancing an honest response with
intelligent behavior.
1 of 3
and Depression
Depression
Although we know drug use and depression are related, it is not always clear how the
two interact. Most people in recovery report having problems with depression from time
to time. Depression can be a particular problem for people who have been using stimu-
lants. Stimulants make people feel “high” by flooding the brain with chemicals called
neurotransmitters that regulate feelings of pleasure. During recovery there are periods
when the brain doesn’t supply enough of those neurotransmitters. The undersupply of
neurotransmitters causes a temporary feeling of depression. But this is different from
being clinically depressed. For some people, depression left untreated can result in
relapse. It is important to be aware of signs of depression and be prepared to cope with
the feelings. If you feel that you cannot cope with your depression or if your depression
lasts for a long time, seek help from a mental health professional. Your counselor or
someone else at your treatment program can refer you to someone for help.
These are some symptoms that might indicate depression. Check all that apply to you:
c Low energy c Stopping exercise program
c Overeating or not eating c Avoiding social activities
c Sad thoughts c Feelings of boredom, irritability,
c Losing interest in career or

or anger
hobbies c Crying spells
c Sleeping more than usual c Suicidal thoughts or actions
c Decreased sex drive c Stopping normal
c Increased thoughts of drinking

activities such as
work, cleaning
c Insomnia house, buying
c Stopping attendance at 12-Step groceries
or mutual-help meetings
2 of 3
and Depression
What other signs indicate depression?
Responses to depression include the following:
l Increase exercise. l Talk to a spouse.
l Plan some new activities. l Talk to a friend.
l Consult a doctor; medication l Talk to a counselor.

may help.
Do you have any other ways of coping effectively with depression?
3 of 3
RP 30 12-Step Programs
What Is AA?
Alcoholics Anonymous (AA) is a worldwide organization. It has been in existence since
the 1930s. It was started by two men who could not recover from their alcoholism with
psychiatry or medicine. AA holds free, open meetings to help people who want to stop
being controlled by their need for alcohol. Meetings are available throughout the day
and evening, 7 days a week. The principles of AA have been adapted to help people
who are dependent on drugs or who have other compulsive disorders, such as gam-
bling or overeating.
Are These Meetings Like Treatment?

No. They are groups of people in recovery helping one another stay abstinent.
Does a Person Need To Enroll or Make an Appointment?

No, just show up. Times and locations of meetings are available through this treatment
program or by calling AA directly.
What Are the 12 Steps?

The basis of groups such as AA is the 12 Steps. These beliefs and activities provide a
structured program for abstinence. There is a strong spiritual aspect to both the 12
Steps and AA.
The 12 Steps of Alcoholics Anonymous*

1. We admitted that we were powerless over alcohol—that our lives
had become unmanageable.
2. Came to believe that a power greater than ourselves could restore

us to sanity.
* The Twelve Steps are reprinted with permission of Alcoholics Anonymous World Services, Inc. (A.A.W.S.). Permission to reprint the Twelve Steps does not mean
that A.A.W.S. has reviewed or approved the contents of this publication, or that A.A.W.S. necessarily agrees with the views expressed herein. A.A. is a program of
recovery from alcoholism only—use of the Twelve Steps in connection with programs and activities which are patterned after A.A., but which address other problems,
or in any other non-A.A. context, does not imply otherwise.
1 of 4
3. Made a decision to turn our will and our lives over to the care of
God, as we understood Him.
4. Made a searching and fearless moral inventory of ourselves.
5. Admitted to God, to ourselves, and to another human being the

exact nature of our wrongs.
6. Were entirely ready to have God remove all these defects of

character.
7. Humbly asked Him to remove our shortcomings.
8. Made a list of all persons we had harmed and became willing to

make amends to them all.
9. Made direct amends to such people wherever possible, except

when to do so would injure them or others.
10. Continued to take personal inventory, and when we were wrong,

promptly admitted it.
11. Sought through prayer and meditation to improve our conscious

contact with God, as we understood Him, praying only for
knowledge of His will for us and the power to carry it out.
12. Having had a spiritual awakening as a result of these Steps,

we tried to carry this message to addicts and to practice these
principles in all our affairs.
What Are CA and NA?

Cocaine Anonymous and Narcotics Anonymous. Other 12-Step groups include
Marijuana Anonymous, Pills Anonymous, Gamblers Anonymous, Overeaters
Anonymous, Emotions Anonymous, and more. Here are the Web site addresses for
these support groups:
2 of 4
l Cocaine Anonymous (CA): www.ca.org
l Narcotics Anonymous (NA): www.na.org
l Marijuana Anonymous (MA): www.marijuana-anonymous.org
l Pills Anonymous (PA): groups.msn.com/PillsAnonymous
l Gamblers Anonymous (GA): www.gamblersanonymous.org
l Overeaters Anonymous (OA): www.oa.org
l Emotions Anonymous (EA): www.emotionsanonymous.org
The methods and principles of the groups are similar although the specific focus differs.
Spinoff groups that use the 12 Steps include Al-Anon and Alateen, Adult Children of
Alcoholics, Co-Dependents Anonymous, and Adult Children of Dysfunctional Families.
Here are the Web site addresses for some of these support groups:
l Al-Anon and Alateen: www.al-anon.alateen.org
l Nar-Anon: www.naranon.com
l Adult Children of Alcoholics (ACoA): www.adultchildren.org
l Co-Dependents Anonymous (CoDA): www.codependents.org
Often people go to more than one type of group. Most people shop around for the
type of group and the specific meetings that they find most comfortable, relevant,
and useful.
What Is CMA?
Crystal Meth Anonymous (www.crystalmeth.org). CMA is a 12-Step group that offers
fellowship and support for people who want to stop using meth. CMA meetings are
3 of 4
open to anyone with a desire to end dependence on meth. Like other 12-Step programs,
CMA has a spiritual focus and encourages participants to work the 12 Steps with the
help of a sponsor. CMA advocates complete abstinence from nonprescribed medication.
What if a Person Is Not Religious?

One can benefit from 12-Step or mutual-help meetings without being religious or work-
ing the 12 Steps. Many people in 12-Step and mutual-help groups are not religious.
These people may think of the higher power mentioned in the 12 Steps as a bigger
frame of reference or a bigger source of knowledge than themselves.
What Do 12-Step Programs Offer?

l A safe place to go during recovery
l A place to meet other people who don’t use drugs and alcohol
l A spiritual component to recovery
l Emotional support
l Exposure to people who have achieved long-term abstinence
l A worldwide network of support that is always available
It is strongly recommended that you attend 12-Step or mutual-support meetings

while you are in treatment. Ask other clients for help in choosing the best meeting for
you. Try several different meetings. Be open to the ways that 12-Step meetings can
support your recovery: social, emotional, or spiritual.
4 of 4
RP 31 Looking Forward;
Managing Downtime
Islands To Look Forward To
There are many important elements to a successful recovery. Structure is important.
Scheduling is important. Balance is important. Your recovery works because you work
at it. Amid the hard work and the structure of recovery, do you feel as if something is
missing? The activities and routines of recovery can seem stifling. Do you feel that
you need to take a break from the routine and get excited about something?
The emotional flatness you experience during recovery may be explained by the following:
l Many people feel particularly bored and tired 2 to 4 months into

recovery (during the period known as the Wall).
l The recovery process the body is going through may prevent you
from feeling strong emotions of any kind.
l Life feels less “on the edge” than it did when you were using.
Planning enjoyable things to look forward to is one way to put a sense of anticipation
and excitement into your life. Some people think of this as building islands of rest,
recreation, or fun. These are islands to look forward to so that the future doesn’t seem
so predictable and routine. The islands don’t need to be extravagant things. They can
be things like
l Going out of town for a 3-day weekend
l Taking a day off work
l Going to a play or a concert
l Attending a sporting event
l Visiting relatives
l Going out to eat
1 of 3
Managing Downtime
l Visiting an old friend
l Having a special date with your partner
Plan these little rewards often enough so that you don’t get too
stressed, tired, or bored in between them.
List some islands that you used What are some possible islands
to use as rewards. ______________ for you now?
Handling Downtime
The Problem
Being in recovery means living responsibly. Always acting intelligently and constantly
guarding against relapse can be exhausting. It is easy to run out of energy and
become tired and bitter. Life can become a cycle of sameness: getting up, going to
work, coming home, lying on the couch, going to bed, and then doing it again the next
day. People in recovery who allow themselves to get to this state of boredom and
exhaustion are very vulnerable to relapse. It is difficult to resist triggers and relapse
justifications when your energy level is so low.
The Old Answer

Drugs and alcohol provided quick relief from boredom and listlessness. All the reasons
for not using substances can be forgotten quickly when the body and mind desperately
need refueling.
2 of 3
Managing Downtime
A New Answer
Each person needs to decide what can replace substance use and provide a refreshing,
satisfying break from the daily grind. What works for you may not work for someone
else. It doesn’t matter what nonusing activities you pursue during your downtime, but it is
necessary to find a way to relax and rejuvenate. The more tired and beaten down you
become, the less energy you will have for staying smart and committed to recovery.
Notice how often you feel stressed, impatient, angry, or closed off emotionally. These
are signs of needing more downtime. Which activities listed below would help
rejuvenate you?
c Walking c Taking a class c Going to the movies

c Reading c Playing team sports c Writing
c Meditating or doing c Bicycling c Knitting

yoga c Painting, drawing c Fishing
c Listening to music c Exercising at the gym c Scrapbooking
c Playing with a pet c Cooking c Window shopping
Becoming active in a Going to 12-Step c Playing a musical
c
church c or mutual-help instrument
c Talking with a friend meetings
who does not use
On a day when you’re stressed and you realize that in the past you would
have said, “I really need a drink” or “I need to get high today,” what will you
do now? What will you do in your downtime?
3 of 3
RP 32 One Day at a Time
People in recovery usually do not relapse because they cannot handle one difficult
day or one troubling situation. Any given day or any single event usually is manage-
able. Things become unmanageable when the person in recovery allows events from
the past or fears of the future to contaminate the present.
Beating yourself up about the past makes you less able to handle the present. You
allow the past to make your recovery more difficult when you tell yourself
l “I can never do anything right. I always mess up every opportunity.”
l “If I try to do something difficult, I will fail. I always do.”
l “I always am letting people down. I always have disappointed everyone.”
You need to find a way to reject those negative thoughts when they come up. The
thought-stopping techniques you learned in Early Recovery Skills (session 1) can help
you move past these negative thoughts. Exercise, meditation, and journal writing also
help you focus your mind and control your thoughts.
Can you think of a recent situation in which you allowed the past to make
the present more difficult?
Don’t allow things that might happen in the future to overwhelm you in the present.
You can plan ahead and be prepared, but you can do little else about the unknown.
You can address only what is happening right now, today. You are filling yourself with
fear when you tell yourself
1 of 2
RP 32
l “Tomorrow something will happen to ruin this.”
l “That person is going to hate me for this.”
l “I will never be able to make it.”
What things do you tell yourself that make you fear the future?
When you have these thoughts, it may help to remind yourself of times when you
did not let your past behavior influence the future. Think of times when you broke
away from an old, destructive pattern. Calling a friend who can remind you of your
successes is a good way to keep yourself focused on today and reject fearful
thoughts of the future.
What things can you tell yourself that will bring you back to the present?
2 of 2
RP 33 Drug Dreams During
Recovery
Early Recovery (0–6 weeks)
Drug use interferes with normal sleeping. When people stop using, they experience
frequent and intense dreams. The dreams seem real and frightening. These dreams
are a normal part of the recovery process. You are not responsible for whether you
use in a dream. Regular exercise may help lessen the dream activity.
Middle Recovery (7–16 weeks)

For most people, dreams are less frequent during this phase of recovery. When they
do occur, however, dreams can leave powerful feelings well into the following day. It is
important to be careful to avoid relapse on days following powerful dream activity.
Often dreams during this period are about choosing to use or not to use, and they can
indicate how you feel about those choices.
Late Recovery (17–24 weeks)

Dreaming during this period is very important and can be helpful in warning the person
in recovery. Sudden dreaming about drug or alcohol use can be a clear message that
there may be a problem and that the dreamer is more vulnerable to relapse than
usual. It is important to review your situation and correct any problems you discover.
Listed below are some of the actions people take when their dreams become intense
and troubling. Add to the list things that would help you in this situation:
l Exercise
l Go to a 12-Step or mutual-help meeting
l Call a counselor
l Talk to friends
l Take a break from your normal routine
l Other:
Name: _________________________________________________ Date: __________
Rate how satisfied you are with the following areas of your life by placing a check-
mark in the appropriate boxes.
Very Somewhat Somewhat Very

Dissatisfied Dissatisfied Neutral Satisfied Satisfied
RP Elective A
Career
Friends
Family
Romantic Relationships
1 of 2
Drug Use/Cravings
Alcohol Use/Cravings
Self-Esteem
Physical Health
Psychological Well-Being
Client Status Review
Sexual Fullfillment
Spiritual Well-Being
RP Elective A
Client Status Review
Which of these areas improved the most since you entered treatment?
Which are your weakest areas? How are you planning to improve them?
What would need to change for you to be satisfied with the areas you rated
lowest?
2 of 2
RP Elective B
Holidays and Recovery
Holiday seasons and the celebrations that come with them are difficult for people in
recovery. Many things can happen to increase the risk of relapse. Review the list
below and check the items that might cause problems for you and your
recovery program during the holidays. Then total up the number of
checkmarks and assess your relapse risk below:
c More alcohol and drugs at parties
c Shortage of money because of travel or gift buying
c More stress caused by hectic pace (for example, traffic, crowds)
c Normal routine of life interrupted
c Stopping exercise
c Not going to AA meetings
c Not going to therapy
c Party atmosphere
c More contact with family
c Increased emotions from holiday memories
c Increased anxiety regarding triggers and craving
c Frustration of not having time to meet responsibilities
c Coping with “New Year’s Eve” type occasions
c Extra free time with no structure
c Other:________________________________________________
1 of 2
RP Elective B
Holidays and Recovery
Mild: If you checked one to three items, the holidays produce only a slightly increased
risk of relapse.
Moderate: If you checked four to six items, the holidays add a lot of stress to your
life. Relapse risk is related to how well you cope with increased stress. Your score
indicates that you need to plan carefully for your recovery during the holidays.
Severe: If you checked seven or more items, the holidays add a major amount of
stress to your life. Relapse prevention means learning how to recognize added stress
and taking extra care during dangerous periods. Your score indicates the holidays are
one of these periods for you.
NO ONE HAS TO RELAPSE. NO ONE BENEFITS FROM A

RELAPSE. THINK ABOUT YOUR RECOVERY PLAN. ADD SOME
MEETINGS. SCHEDULE YOUR TIME. SEE YOUR COUNSELOR.
TO GET THROUGH THIS STRESSFUL TIME, USE THE TOOLS
THAT HAVE HELPED YOU STAY ABSTINENT IN RECOVERY.
NO ONE HAS
TO RELAPSE!
2 of 2
RP Elective C Recreational
Activities
In addition to abstaining from substance use, it is important for you to put some
interesting activities in your life. For many people in recovery, substance use was the
main thing they did to relax and have a good time. Now that you are abstinent and in
recovery, it is important to find fun things to do that can take the place of substance
use. You might try returning to old activities you used to enjoy before you started
using substances.
What are some hobbies or activities that you used to enjoy and might like
to try again?
New activities and hobbies are an excellent way to support your recovery while you
meet new people. Now is the time to take a class, learn a new skill, try your hand at
making art, take up a new sport, do volunteer work, or try out other new interests. Ask
your friends about hobbies that they enjoy. See about adult classes that are offered at
local colleges. Consult your local community’s directory or Web site for listings of
activities and classes. Check the newspaper for lectures, movies, plays, and concerts.
What new activities and interests would you like to pursue?
It is important to remember that not all new activities will be fun right away. It may take
a while before you can really enjoy a new activity or become proficient at a new skill.
Old activities that you enjoyed may not feel the same now that you’re
abstinent and in recovery. Regardless of how new or old activities feel,
you need to make them part of your life.
VI. Social Support Group
Introduction They are 90 minutes long and should be limited
to 10 people per group so that each client has
Goals of Social Support Group time to participate.
n Provide a safe discussion group where

Clients who have been co-leaders during Early
clients practice resocialization skills.
Recovery Skills or Relapse Prevention group
n Provide opportunities for clients who are meetings can act as facilitators, under the coun-
advanced in treatment and recovery to selor’s supervision. Client–facilitators should be
serve as role models for clients who have screened carefully for emotional stability, intel-
been in recovery for less time. lectual competence, and strength of recovery.
They should commit to attending regularly for 6
n Encourage clients to broaden their sup-
months and should meet with the counselor
port system of abstinent, recovering con-
before the group session to be briefed on the
tacts with whom they can attend 12-Step
topic and issues relevant to individual clients.
or mutual-help meetings.
n Provide a less structured and more inde- The client–facilitator’s job is to help the discus-
pendent group environment that helps sion run smoothly so that clients can get the
clients progress from treatment in the most benefit from the Social Support group. The
more structured environments of Early counselor should provide the client–facilitator the
Recovery Skills and Relapse Prevention following guidelines for aiding the discussion:
groups to recovery maintained with group
support but without clinical support. n Listen to clients, help them clarify what
they are saying, but do not speak for
Session Format and Counseling them or provide answers.
Approach n Encourage group members to accept and
The Social Support component of the Matrix support one another.
Intensive Outpatient Treatment for People With
n Focus on the members; do not assume a
Stimulant Use Disorders (IOP) model comprises
position of authority or monopolize the
36 group sessions that are held once a week
discussion.
over 36 weeks. Social Support group sessions
overlap with the final 4 weeks of the intensive n Permit clients to depart briefly from the
phase of Matrix IOP method and allow clients to session’s topic if the discussion seems
continue group work for nearly 9 months after beneficial to all clients in the group.
the conclusion of major treatment components
n Steer participants away from lengthy
(Early Recovery Skills, Relapse Prevention, and
stories of using that might act as triggers
Family Education). Clients who have attained a
for others.
stable recovery and have completed 12 weeks
or more of Early Recovery Skills and Relapse n Make sure that the group is not dominated
Prevention group sessions should begin attend- by one or two members and that every-
ing Social Support group sessions. Social one in the group gets time to speak.
Support groups are primarily discussion sessions.
233
n Avoid making generalizations. The counselor may choose to use topics that
are not listed here, as the needs of the clients
n Avoid asking “why” questions of members
in the groups dictate. The topics are presented
(e.g., questioning their actions or
alphabetically and can be used in any order the
motivations).
counselor deems most useful to the group.
The counselor opens the group session by

welcoming clients and introducing the topic for
Aging
the session. The counselor then facilitates a 1. How do you view the aging process?
discussion that can include the session topic, What negative aspects do you see? What
abstinence issues, and problems the clients are positive developments come with age?
experiencing in establishing a substance-free 2. How does getting older affect your staying
lifestyle. The following section lists the one-word abstinent and in recovery?
session topics, along with questions, that the
counselor and client–facilitator use to encour- 3. Is this your first time in recovery? If not,
age discussion. If clinical issues arise that have you approached recovery differently
require the counselor’s attention before the end this time?
of the session (e.g., a client has relapsed 4. As you grow older, is it important for you
recently or is going through a personal crisis to find a 12-Step meeting or mutual-help
that places recovery in jeopardy), the group that has people your own age?
client–facilitator should notify the counselor
privately. If the group is broken into smaller 5. As you spend more time in recovery, how
discussion groups, the counselor should recon- will you keep your recovery strong?
vene the larger group 5 or 10 minutes before
the end of the session to recapitulate important Anger
issues relevant to the session’s topic and to 1. How do you feel about the way you
address any problems or concerns that arose handle your anger?
during discussion.
2. How do you feel when anger is directed at
you?
Social Support Group 3. Is anger a relapse trigger for you? In what
Topics ways?
The 36 topics below address key concepts in 4. What strategies or behaviors help you
recovery and are suggested focal points for dis- cope with anger?
cussion in the Social Support groups. Each 5. How do you avoid being passive–
topic includes questions that the counselor and aggressive when someone angers you?
client–facilitator can pose to initiate and sustain
group discussion. Relevant session descriptions n Relapse Prevention Session 23:
and handouts from the Early Recovery Skills Managing Anger
and Relapse Prevention portions of treatment
are listed after the questions for some topics. n Handout RP 23—Managing Anger
During the course of discussion, the counselor
may wish to refer to information included in the
session descriptions or the handouts.
234
Codependence n Relapse Prevention Session 28:

Compulsive Behaviors
1. How do you understand the concept of
codependence? n Handout RP 28—Compulsive Behaviors
2. With whom do you have codependent
relationships? Control
1. How do you distinguish between things
3. How do these relationships affect your
that you can control and things you
recovery?
cannot?
4. During recovery, what changes have
2. How do you respond to things you cannot
you made to address codependent
control?
relationships?
3. How has attending 12-Step or mutual-help
5. What strategies and techniques will you
meetings helped you address these
use to avoid codependence in the future?
issues?
Commitment 4. What actions do you take to achieve

balance and inner calm in your life?
1. What does commitment mean to your
recovery? 5. What aspects of your life do you still need
to change to remain abstinent and in
2. What people or things have you been
recovery?
committed to in the past? What are you
committed to now?
n Relapse Prevention Session 27: Serenity
3. How important is the commitment of Prayer
family and friends to your recovery?
n Handout RP 27—Serenity Prayer
4. How important is your commitment to
friends and fellow clients who are in Cravings
recovery? 1. Do you still experience cravings for sub-
5. How will you maintain your commitment stances? How have the cravings changed
to recovery? since you’ve been in recovery?
2. Do you feel as if your recovery is in

Compulsions jeopardy because of cravings? Why or
1. What have you done to avoid transferring why not?
your substance dependence to other
3. When are you aware of cravings?
compulsive behaviors?
4. What changes have you made to reduce
2. To what compulsive behaviors are you
cravings?
vulnerable?
5. What strategies and techniques will you
3. Are all compulsive behaviors bad?
use to keep cravings under control?
4. How has being in recovery helped you get
n Early Recovery Skills Session 1: Stop
your life under control?
the Cycle
5. What can you do to avoid abstinence
n Handout ERS 1A—Triggers
violation syndrome?
235
n Handout ERS 1B—Trigger–Thought– n Relapse Prevention Session 18:

Craving–Use Emotional Triggers
n Handout ERS 1C—Thought-Stopping n Relapse Prevention Session 29: Coping

Techniques With Feelings and Depression
n Handout RP 18—Emotional Triggers

Depression
1. Is depression a trigger for you? How do n Handout RP 29—Coping With Feelings
you recognize that you’re depressed? and Depression
2. How have your feelings of depression Fear

changed as you’ve been in treatment and
1. When you entered treatment, what
recovery?
aspects of recovery were you afraid of?
3. What people, events, and feelings
2. Have your fears about recovery changed
contribute to your depression?
since you’ve been in treatment?
4. How do you respond when you recognize
3. What helped you move past your fear?
that you are depressed?
4. What things concern you when you think
5. What strategies and techniques help
about leaving treatment?
you avoid becoming depressed? What
strategies and techniques help you get 5. As you move forward with your recovery,
over depression? what strategies and techniques will help
you minimize your fears?
n Relapse Prevention Session 29: Coping
With Feelings and Depression Friendship
n Handout ERS 5—Roadmap for Recovery 1. How has your understanding of friendship
changed since you’ve been in treatment?
n Handout RP 29—Coping With Feelings
and Depression 2. Before you entered treatment, what were
your friendships based on?
Emotions 3. Now, what qualities do you look for in a
1. Do certain emotions act as triggers for friend?
you? Which emotions?
4. What has being a friend to others con-
2. How has the process of recovery helped tributed to your recovery?
you become more aware of your
5. What plans do you have for making new,
emotions?
supportive friends and maintaining current
3. How do you cope with dangerous friendships?
emotions, such as loneliness, anger, and
feelings of deprivation? n Relapse Prevention Session 25: Making
New Friends
4. During recovery, what have you learned
about separating emotions from behavior? n Relapse Prevention Session 26: Repairing
Relationships
5. What strategies and techniques help you
maintain an emotional balance?
236
n Handout RP 25—Making New Friends 3. How can guilt derail your recovery?
n Handout RP 26—Repairing Relationships 4. What can you do to reduce the guilt you
feel?
Fun 5. What role has taking responsibility for
1. How have your fun and relaxing activities past actions played in your recovery?
2. What do you do now to have fun and n Relapse Prevention Session 5: Guilt and
relax? Shame
3. With whom do you have fun? n Handout RP 5—Guilt and Shame
4. What role does having fun play in staying Happiness

abstinent and in your recovery?
1. Since you’ve been in treatment, when
5. How will you incorporate new activities have you been happy? What made you
and hobbies into your life? happy?
2. Since you’ve been in treatment, how has
n Relapse Prevention Session 31: Looking
what makes you happy changed?
Forward; Managing Downtime
3. Do you feel that happiness is essential to
n Elective Session C: Recreational Activities
your recovery? Why or why not?
n Handout RP 31—Looking Forward;
4. How have friendships helped you be
Managing Downtime
happy?
n Handout RP Elective C—Recreational
5. What strategies or techniques can you
Activities
use to help you through unhappy times?
Grief
Honesty
1. What experience have you had with grief?
1. How important is honesty to your staying
2. Is grief a trigger for you? In what ways? abstinent and in recovery?
3. How has the way you cope with grief 2. In treatment, how have you learned to be
changed since you’ve been in recovery? honest with yourself?
How do you cope with feelings of grief
3. In treatment, how have you learned to be
now?
honest with others, especially family and
4. To whom do you turn when you experi- friends?
ence grief?
4. How does honesty relate to your self-
5. What strategies or techniques do you use esteem?
to keep grief from disrupting your recovery?
5. What strategies or techniques will you use
Guilt to continue being honest in your recovery?
1. How is guilt different from shame? n Relapse Prevention Session 8:
2. Can guilt be a positive factor in your Truthfulness
recovery? In what ways? n Handout RP 8—Truthfulness
237
Intimacy 2. What emotions make you more likely to

try to justify a relapse?
1. Since you’ve been in treatment, how has
your understanding of intimacy changed? 3. What are the dangers of assuming that
your substance dependence is under
2. What concerns or fears do you have
control?
about intimacy?
4. How is being smart important to your
3. Does sex function as a trigger for you? In
staying abstinent and in recovery?
what ways?
5. In treatment, what strategies or tech-
4. What do you look for in an intimate,
niques have you learned to help counter
caring relationship?
relapse justifications?
5. In what ways can intimate relationships
support your recovery? n Relapse Prevention Session 16: Relapse
Justification I
n Relapse Prevention Session 10: Sex and
n Relapse Prevention Session 21: Relapse
Recovery
Justification II
n Handout RP 10—Sex and Recovery
n Handout RP 16—Relapse Justification I
Isolation n Handout RP 21—Relapse Justification II
1. Are free time and being alone triggers for
you? In what ways? Masks
1. How do you use masks to hide the way
2. How was feeling isolated related to your
you feel, presenting yourself as feeling
substance abuse?
one way when you really feel another?
3. In what ways has scheduling activities
2. In what circumstances do you mask your
helped you avoid isolation?
feelings?
3. How has the masking of your feelings
meetings helped you avoid isolation?
5. What activities can you pursue on your
4. How does masking your true feelings
own that will help keep you from isolation?
affect your recovery?
n Relapse Prevention Session 2: Boredom 5. How is being honest with yourself and
n Relapse Prevention Session 6: Staying others important to your recovery?
Busy
n Relapse Prevention Session 8:
n Handout RP 2—Boredom Truthfulness
n Handout RP 6—Staying Busy n Handout RP 8—Truthfulness
Justifications Overwhelmed
1. What relapse justifications are you vulner- 1. What contributes to your feeling
able to? overwhelmed?
238
2. How does feeling overwhelmed affect 4. How have you begun to take better care
your behavior? of your health?
3. How has your response to being over- 5. Why is it important to stay healthy to keep
whelmed changed since you’ve been in your recovery on track?
treatment?
n Relapse Prevention Session 19: Illness
4. What risk does feeling overwhelmed pose
to your recovery? n Relapse Prevention Session 17: Taking
Care of Yourself
5. What can you do to ensure that you do
not feel overwhelmed? n Handout RP 19—Illness
n Handout RP 17—Taking Care of Yourself

n Relapse Prevention Session 20:
Recognizing Stress
Recovery
n Relapse Prevention Session 22: Reducing 1. Has your motivation for recovery changed
Stress since you’ve been in treatment? In what
n Handout RP 20—Recognizing Stress ways?
n Handout RP 22—Reducing Stress 2. What has been your biggest challenge in

recovery so far? Your biggest triumph?
Patience 3. From whom do you draw inspiration and
1. How has patience helped you in your encouragement in your recovery? Do you
recovery? have a recovering role model?
2. When is it hard for you to be patient? 4. How has attending 12-Step or mutual-help
meetings helped you in your recovery?
3. Are there situations in which you can be
too patient? What are they? Why can it be 5. As you move forward with recovery, what
bad to be too patient? are the most important aspects for you to
focus on?
meetings helped you be more patient?
n Relapse Prevention Session 7: Motivation
5. What strategies and techniques have you for Recovery
learned to help you be more patient?
n Handout RP 7—Motivation for Recovery
Physical
Rejection
1. How is your recovery related to your self-
1. Did feeling rejected contribute to your
esteem?
substance abuse? In what ways?
2. During recovery, how has your body
2. How have the ways you cope with rejection
changed?
3. What new exercise or activity have you
3. How has support from friends and family
begun since entering treatment?
helped you cope with rejection?
239
4. As you make amends and repair relation- 3. How do you balance the structure that
ships, some people may refuse to forgive rules provide with the need to relax and
you. How will you cope with this rejection? enjoy yourself?
5. What strategies and techniques will you 4. How have the guidelines of 12-Step or
use to address rejection as you go for- mutual-help programs supported your
ward with your recovery? abstinence and recovery?
5. What rules will be important for you as

n Relapse Prevention Session 26: Repairing
you move forward with your recovery?
Relationships
n Handout RP 26—Repairing Relationships Scheduling

1. In what ways have you used scheduling
Relaxation during your recovery? How has it helped
1. How have the things you do to relax support your recovery?
2. Do you use scheduling all the time or only
2. Are leisure and downtime triggers for once in a while? At what times do you find
you? it is helpful to use scheduling?
3. How have you managed to separate 3. What makes scheduling difficult for you?
relaxing from substance abuse?
4. How have friends and family supported
4. Do you prefer to relax alone or with your use of scheduling?
friends and family? Why?
5. Do you think you will continue to use
5. How have you used scheduling and scheduling after you leave treatment?
islands of enjoyment to help you relax and Why or why not?
keep your recovery on track?
n Early Recovery Skills Session 1: Stop the
n Relapse Prevention Session 31: Looking Cycle
Forward; Managing Downtime
n Handout SCH 1—The Importance of
n Elective Session C: Recreational Activities Scheduling
n Handout RP 31—Looking Forward;
Managing Downtime
Selfishness
1. In what ways did selfishness contribute to
n Handout RP Elective C—Recreational your substance dependence?
Activities
2. Are there times when it is a good idea to
Rules be selfish? What are they?
1. How do you respond to rules in general? 3. How can selfishness be harmful to your
How have you responded to the rules recovery?
you’ve encountered in treatment?
4. How have family and friends helped you
2. What rules do you impose on yourself? become less selfish? How have 12-Step
or mutual-help programs helped you
become less selfish?
240
5. Do you think it is selfish to take time alone 2. Why is it important for your recovery to
for exercising, relaxing, meditating, or have a spiritual component?
writing in a diary? Why or why not?
Sex group meetings helped you stay abstinent
1. Is sex a trigger for you? In what ways? and in recovery?
2. What distinguishes impulsive sex from 4. What qualities are important to you in
intimate sex? choosing a 12-Step or mutual-help group
to attend?
3. How can impulsive sex lead to relapse?
5. Aside from attending meetings, what other
4. How can an intimate relationship help spiritual elements have you incorporated
support your recovery? into your life during recovery? Will you
5. What will you do to encourage healthy, continue these practices?
intimate relationships in your life?
n Relapse Prevention Session 27: Serenity
n Relapse Prevention Session 10: Sex and Prayer
Recovery n Relapse Prevention Session 30: 12-Step
n Handout RP 10—Sex and Recovery and Mutual-Help Programs
n Handout RP 27—Serenity Prayer

Smart
n Handout RP 30—12-Step Programs
1. Why is sheer willpower not enough to
help you stay abstinent and in recovery?
Thought Stopping
2. How is being smart part of having a 1. How has thought stopping helped you
strong recovery? cope with cravings to use? Give some
3. How has anticipating situations in which specific examples.
you would be prone to relapse helped you 2. Which thought-stopping techniques are
stay abstinent and in recovery? most effective for you? Why?
4. When have you tried to be strong, instead 3. What do you visualize when you use
of smart? What were the results? thought-stopping techniques?
5. What strategies and techniques will you 4. Do you feel that you are more in control
use to be smart as you go forward with of your thoughts now than you were when
your recovery? you entered treatment? Why or why not?
n Relapse Prevention Session 13: Be 5. What role will thought stopping play in
Smart, Not Strong your recovery after you leave treatment?
n Handout RP 13—Be Smart, Not Strong n Early Recovery Skills Session 1: Stop the
Cycle
Spirituality n Handout ERS 1C—Thought-Stopping
1. How would you define spirituality? Has Techniques
that definition changed as a result of
being in treatment?
241
Triggers 4. If people are slow to trust that you are

abstinent and in recovery, how will you
1. What triggers do you still encounter in
respond? What will you do if trust never
your daily life?
returns to some relationships?
2. Are there triggers you cannot avoid? How
5. How has placing your trust in fellow treat-
do you cope with those triggers?
ment group members and 12-Step or
3. How has charting your external and mutual-help group members helped your
internal triggers helped strengthen your recovery?
recovery?
n Relapse Prevention Session 12: Trust
4. How have family and friends helped you
cope with triggers? n Handout RP 12—Trust
5. What strategies and techniques have
helped you stop triggers you encounter
Work
from becoming cravings for substances? 1. How has your work life affected your
recovery? Have there been positive
n Early Recovery Skills Session 2: effects? Negative effects?
Identifying External Triggers
2. What steps have you taken to balance
n Early Recovery Skills Session 3: work with recovery? Have they been
Identifying Internal Triggers successful?
n Handout ERS 1A—Triggers 3. How has the balance of work and recov-
ery changed since you’ve progressed in
n Handout ERS 2B—External Trigger Chart
recovery?
n Handout ERS 3B—Internal Trigger Chart
4. Have you considered leaving your job?
What are the potential pitfalls of doing
Trust this? What are the benefits?
1. How has lack of trust damaged relation-
5. Aside from the money, what do you find
ships in your life?
rewarding about your work?
2. Why is it important for your recovery that
n Relapse Prevention Session 4: Work and
your friends, family, and others be able to
trust you? Recovery
n Handout RP 4—Work and Recovery

3. In addition to staying abstinent, what can
you do to earn back people’s trust?
242
Appendix A.
The Methamphetamine
Treatment Project
Overview along with the Matrix model, either required or
recommended that participants attend 12-Step
Conducted over 18 months between 1999 and or mutual-help groups during their treatment,
2001, the Methamphetamine Treatment Project and all treatment models encouraged participa-
(MTP) is (to date) the largest randomized clinical tion in continuing care activities after primary
trial of treatment approaches for methampheta- treatment.
mine dependence; 978 individuals participated in
the study (Rawson et al. 2004). MTP researchers The characteristics of a cross-section of partici-
randomly assigned participants at each treatment pants in MTP (both TAU and Matrix participants)
site into either the Matrix model treatment or the were found to be consistent with those of the
program’s treatment as usual (TAU). The study clinical populations who participated in similar
design did not standardize TAU across sites, so studies of treatment for methamphetamine abuse
each program offered different outpatient treat- (Huber et al. 1997; Rawson et al. 2000). Figure
ment models (including lengths of treatment A-1 lists specific client characteristics.
ranging from 4 to 16 weeks). All TAU models,
Figure A-1. Characteristics of MTP Participants

Male 45% Average education 12.2 years
Female 55%
Caucasian 60% Employed 69%
Hispanic/Latino 18%
Asian/Pacific Islander 17%
Other* 5%
Average age 32.8 years Average lifetime methamphetamine use 7.54 years
Average days of methamphetamine use in 11.53 days
the past 30 days
Married and not 16% Preferred route of methamphetamine

separated administration
Smoking 65%
Intravenous 24%
Intranasal 11%
*Two percent of participants in the Other category were African American (personal correspondence with Jeanne Obert, Matrix Institute, November 2004).
Source: Rawson et al. 2004, p. 711.
243
Participants’ histories indicated multiple substance

use. During the study, participant self-reports and
Results
drug and breath-alcohol tests confirmed that No significant differences in substance use and
some clients had used marijuana or alcohol, as functioning were found between TAU and Matrix
well as methamphetamines, but no other sub- groups at discharge and at 6-month followup.
stances of abuse were identified. However, the MTP study found that the Matrix
model participants (Rawson et al. 2004)
All MTP participants completed baseline
assessments including the methamphetamine- n Had consistently better treatment reten-
dependence checklist in the Diagnostic and tion rates than did TAU participants
Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fourth
Edition (American Psychiatric Association n Were 27 percent more likely than TAU
1994), and the Addiction Severity Index participants to complete treatment
(McLellan et al. 1992). The assessments were n Were 31 percent more likely than TAU
repeated at several points during participants’ participants to have methamphetamine-
active treatment, at discharge from treatment, free urine test results while in treatment
and at 6 and 12 months after their dates of dis-
charge from the program. Urine drug testing was At 6-month followup, more than 65 percent of
conducted weekly throughout active treatment. both Matrix and TAU participants had negative
urine tests for methamphetamine and other
drugs (Rawson et al. 2004).
244
Appendix B.
Notes on Group Facilitation
All clients in a group develop individual relation- have input. The counselor should ensure that a
ships with their counselor. The degree to which few members do not monopolize the group’s
the counselor can instigate positive change in time. Clients must feel that the counselor is
clients’ lives is related directly to the credibility interested in their participation in the group as
that the counselor establishes. The counselor it relates to abstinence. The counselor must
must be perceived as a highly credible source be clearly, actively, unquestionably in control
of information about substance use. Two keys of the group.
to establishing credibility with clients are the
degree to which the counselor engages and The counselor needs to be sensitive to emotion-
maintains control over a group and the coun- al and practical issues that arise in group. At
selor’s ability to make all participants perceive times it also may be necessary to be directive
the group as a safe place. and confrontational or to characterize input from
group members as a reflection of addictive
These two elements are highly interrelated. For thinking. In these instances the counselor
a group to feel safe, the members need to view should focus on the addiction as opposed to the
the counselor as competent and in control. person. In other words, care should be taken to
Sometimes, group members enter the group avoid directing negative feedback toward the
with a lot of energy and are talkative and bois- client, focusing instead on the addiction-based
terous. Frequently this situation occurs during aspects of the client’s behavior or thinking.
holidays, particularly if several members have
relapsed. The counselor should use verbal and The counselor is preferably the professional
nonverbal methods of calming the group and who also sees the members of the group for the
focusing the group on the session topic. prescribed Individual/Conjoint sessions. The
Conversely, there may be times when group advantage of this dual role (group leader and
members are lethargic, sluggish, and individual counselor) is that the counselor can
depressed. During these times, the counselor coordinate more effectively and guide the
should infuse energy and enthusiasm. He or progressive recovery of each individual. The
she needs to be aware of the emotional tone of frequency of contact also strengthens the
the group and respond accordingly. therapeutic bond that can hold the client in
treatment. A potential disadvantage of the dual
In a similar manner, the members of a group role is the possible danger that the counselor
need to feel that the counselor is keeping the may inadvertently expose confidential client
group moving in a useful and healthful direction. information to the group before the client
The counselor must be willing to interrupt pri- chooses to do so. It is a violation of boundaries
vate conversations in the group, terminate a for the counselor even to imply that information
graphic drug use story, or redirect a lengthy tan- exists and to attempt to coerce a client into shar-
gential diversion. He or she must be perceived ing that information if the client has not planned
as clearly in control of the time in the group. to do so in the group.
Each member must be given an opportunity to
245
Another danger to be avoided is the counselor’s and other helpful information for conducting
being perceived as showing preference to some group therapy in Treatment Improvement
clients. It is important that the counselor be Protocol 41, Substance Abuse Treatment: Group
equally supportive of all group members and not Therapy (CSAT 2005b), a free publication from
allow them to engage in competition for attention. the Center for Substance Abuse Treatment.
The counselor can find discussions of group

development, leadership, concepts, techniques,
246
Appendix C.
Sample Agreement for Co-Leaders
and Client–Facilitators
All clients serving as group co-leaders or client–facilitators are required to read and agree to abide by
the conditions below, as indicated by initialing each item and signing at the bottom of the form.
As a co-leader or client–facilitator I agree to the following:
_____ To commit to participating in ____ group sessions per week for at least 3 months (for co-
leaders) or 6 months (for client–facilitators).
_____ To participate in regular pregroup and postgroup meetings with my assigned group counselor.
_____ To be on time for scheduled groups. If I am unable to attend a scheduled group, I will call and
notify the program 24 hours in advance.
_____ To abstain from using illicit drugs or alcohol and from abusing prescription drugs.
_____ To respect and maintain client confidentiality with respect to information disclosed in group
sessions.
_____ Not to become involved socially, sexually, or economically with group members or with other
program clients.
_____ To abide by the program’s statement of ethical conduct.
_____ That I am entering this agreement on a strictly volunteer basis; I understand that I will not be
paid for my time.
_____ To actively participate in some form of ongoing recovery support or treatment.
_____ That any departure from the above conditions could result in my termination from the co-leader
or client–facilitator position.
___________________________________________________________ ____________________
Co-Leader’s Signature Date
___________________________________________________________ ____________________
Client–Facilitator’s Signature Date
___________________________________________________________ ____________________
Counselor’s Signature Date
___________________________________________________________ ____________________
Program Director’s Signature Date
247
Appendix D.
Acronyms and Abbreviations List
AA Alcoholics Anonymous
ACoA Adult Children of Alcoholics
Al-Anon A support group for families and loved ones of people who are addicted to alcohol
Alateen A support group for young family members and loved ones of people who are addicted
to alcohol
ASI Addiction Severity Index
CA Cocaine Anonymous
CAL Calendar (for worksheets used during scheduling)
CMA Crystal Meth Anonymous
CoDA Co-Dependents Anonymous
CSAT Center for Substance Abuse Treatment
EA Emotions Anonymous
ERS Early Recovery Skills
GA Gamblers Anonymous
HALT Hungry Angry Lonely Tired
IC Individual/Conjoint
IOP Intensive Outpatient Treatment for People With Stimulant Use Disorders
JACS Jewish Alcoholics, Chemically Dependent Persons and Significant Others
MA Marijuana Anonymous
meth Methamphetamine
MTP Methamphetamine Treatment Project
NA Narcotics Anonymous
Nar-Anon A support group for families and loved ones of people who are addicted to narcotics
OA Overeaters Anonymous
PA Pills Anonymous
RP Relapse Prevention
SAMHSA Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration
SCH Schedule (for worksheets used during scheduling)
SMART Self-Management and Recovery Training
SS Social Support
TAU Treatment as Usual
249
Appendix E.
Further Reading
The articles listed below provide more information about treatment for methamphetamine dependence
in general and the Matrix model in particular.
Anglin, M.D.; Burke, C.; Perrochet, B.; Stamper, E.; and Dawud-Noursi, S. History of the methamphet-
amine problem. Journal of Psychoactive Drugs 32(2):137–141, 2000.
Anglin, M.D., and Rawson, R.A. The CSAT Methamphetamine Treatment Project: What are we trying
to accomplish? Journal of Pscyhoactive Drugs 32(2):209–210, 2000.
Brecht, M.-L.; von Mayrhauser, C.; and Anglin, M.D. Predictors of relapse after treatment for metham-
phetamine use. Journal of Psychoactive Drugs 32(2):211–220, 2000.
Brown, A.H. Integrating research and practice in the CSAT Methamphetamine Treatment Project.
Journal of Substance Abuse Treatment 26(2):103–108, 2004.
Cohen, J.B.; Dickow, A.; Horner, K.; Zweben, J.E.; Balabis, J.; Vandersloot, D.; Reiber, C.; and
Methamphetamine Treatment Project. Abuse and violence history of men and women in treat-
ment for methamphetamine dependence. American Journal on Addictions 12(5):377–385, 2003.
Cretzmeyer, M.; Sarrazin, M.V.; Huber, D.L.; Block, R.I.; and Hall, J.A. Treatment of methamphetamine
abuse: Research findings and clinical directions. Journal of Substance Treatment
24(3):267–277, 2003.
Domier, C.P.; Simon, S.L.; Rawson, R.A.; Huber, A.; and Ling, W. A comparison of injecting and nonin-
jecting methamphetamine users. Journal of Psychoactive Drugs 32(2):229–232, 2000.
Freese, T.E.; Obert, J.; Dickow, A.; Cohen, J.; and Lord, R.H. Methamphetamine abuse: Issues for
special populations. Journal of Psychoactive Drugs 32(2):177–182, 2000.
Hartz, D.T.; Frederick-Osborne, S.L.; and Galloway, G.P. Craving predicts use during treatment for
methamphetamine dependence: A prospective, repeated-measures, within-subject analysis.
Drug and Alcohol Dependence 63(3):269–276, 2001.
Maglione, M.; Chao, B.; and Anglin, M.D. Correlates of outpatient drug treatment drop-out among
methamphetamine users. Journal of Psychoactive Drugs 32(2):221–228, 2000.
251
Obert, J.L.; Brown, A.H.; Zweben, J.; Christian, D.; Delmhorst, J.; Minsky, S.; Morrisey, P.;
Vandersloot, D.; and Weiner, A. When treatment meets research: Clinical perspectives from the
CSAT Methamphetamine Treatment Project. Journal of Substance Abuse Treatment
28(3):231–237, 2005.
Obert, J.L.; London, E.D.; and Rawson, R.A. Incorporating brain research findings into standard treat-
ment: An example using the Matrix Model. Journal of Substance Abuse Treatment
23(2):107–113, 2002.
Peck, J.A.; Reback, C.J.; Yang, X.; Rotheram-Fuller, E.; and Shoptaw, S. Sustained reductions in drug
use and depression symptoms from treatment for drug abuse in methamphetamine-dependent
gay and bisexual men. Journal of Urban Health 82(1 suppl 1):i100–i108.
Rawson, R.A.; Anglin, M.D.; and Ling, W. Will the methamphetamine problem go away? Journal of
Addictive Diseases 21(1):5–19, 2002. www.asam.org/jol/Articles/Rawson%20et%20al%20article.
pdf [accessed March 1, 2006].
Rawson, R.; Huber, A.; Brethen, P.; Obert, J.; Gulati, V.; Shoptaw, S.; and Ling, W. Methamphetamine
and cocaine users: Difference in characteristics and treatment retention. Journal of Psychoactive
Drugs 32(2):233–238, 2000.
Rawson, R.A.; Huber, A.; Brethen, P.; Obert, J.; Gulati, V.; Shoptaw, S.; and Ling, W. Status of
methamphetamine users 2–5 years after outpatient treatment. Journal of Addictive Diseases
21(1):107–119, 2002.
Rawson, R.A.; Marinelli-Casey, P.; Anglin, M.D.; Dickow, A.; Frazier, Y.; Gallagher, C.; Galloway, G.P.;
Herrell, J.; Huber, A.; McCann, M.J.; Obert, J.; Pennell, S.; Reiber, C.; Vandersloot, D.; Zweben,
J.; and Methamphetamine Treatment Project. A multi-site comparison of psychosocial approaches
for the treatment of methamphetamine dependence. Addiction 99(6):708–717, 2004.
Rawson, R.A.; McCann, M.J.; Huber, A.; Marinelli-Casey, P.; and Williams, L. Moving research into
community settings in the CSAT Methamphetamine Treatment Project: The coordinating center
perspective. Journal of Psychoactive Drugs 32(2):201–208, 2000.
von Mayrhauser, C.; Brecht, M.-L.; and Anglin, M.D. Use ecology and drug use motivations of
methamphetamine users admitted to substance abuse treatment facilities in Los Angeles: An
emerging profile. Journal of Addictive Diseases 21(1):45–60, 2002.
Zweben, J.E.; Cohen, J.B.; Christian, D.; Galloway, G.P.; Salinardi, M.; Parent, D.; Iguchi, M.: and
Methamphetamine Treatment Project. Psychiatric symptoms in methamphetamine users.
American Journal on Addictions 13(2):181–190, 2004.
252
Appendix F.
Field Reviewers
Rosie Anderson-Harper, M.A., RSAP Marty Estrada, CAS, CSS-III
Mental Health Manager Ventura, CA
Missouri Department of Mental Health
Jefferson City, MO Eric Haram, LADAC
Administrative Specialist
Stephen R. Andrew, M.S.W., LCSW, Mercy Recovery Center
LADC, CGP Westbrook, ME
Director
Health Education Training Institute Sherry Kimbrough, M.S., NCAC
Portland, ME Vice President
Lanstat, Inc.
Michelle M. Bartley Port Townsend, WA
Behavioral Health Specialist
Division of Behavioral Health Thomas A. Peltz, LMHC, LADAC-1
Anchorage, AK Therapist
Private Practice
Frances Clark, Ph.D., MAC, LADAC, Beverly Farms, MA
QSAP, CCJS
Director of Behavioral Services John L. Roberts, M.Ed., CCDC III-E, LPC, MAC
Metro Public Health Department Consultant/Trainer
Nashville, TN Continuing Education Center
Cincinnati, OH
María del Mar García, M.H.S., LCSW
Continuing Education Coordinator Jim Rowan, M.A., LAC
Caribbean Basin and Hispanic Addiction Program Manager
Technology Transfer Center Arapahoe House, Inc.
Universidad Central del Caribe Thornton, CO
Bayamón, PR
Angel Velez, CASAC
Darcy Edwards, Ph.D., M.S.W., CADC II Addiction Program Specialist II
Substance Abuse Treatment Coordinator Office of Alcohol and Substance Abuse
Oregon Department of Corrections Services
Salem, OR New York, NY
253
Appendix G.
References
American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fourth
Edition. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1994.
CSAT (Center for Substance Abuse Treatment). Substance Abuse Treatment for Persons With
Co-Occurring Disorders. Treatment Improvement Protocol Series (TIP) 42. DHHS Publication
No. (SMA) 05-3992. Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services
Administration, 2005a.
CSAT (Center for Substance Abuse Treatment). Substance Abuse Treatment: Group Therapy.
Treatment Improvement Protocol (TIP) Series 41. DHHS Publication No. (SMA) 05-3991.
Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, 2005b.
CSAT (Center for Substance Abuse Treatment). Improving Cultural Competence in Substance Abuse
Treatment. Treatment Improvement Protocol (TIP) Series. Rockville, MD: Substance Abuse and
Mental Health Services Administration, forthcoming.
Huber, A.; Ling, W.; Shoptaw, S.; Gulati, V.; Brethen, P.; and Rawson, R. Integrating treatments for
methamphetamine abuse: A psychosocial perspective. Journal of Addictive Diseases
16(4):41–50, 1997.
McLellan, A.T.; Kushner, H.; Metzger, D.; Peters, R.; Smith, L.; Grissom, G.; Pettinati, H.; and Argeriou,
M. The fifth edition of the Addiction Severity Index. Journal of Substance Abuse Treatment
9:199–213, 1992.
Obert, J.; McCann, M.J.; Marinelli-Casey, P.; Weiner, A.; Minsky, S.; Brethen, P.; and Rawson, R. The
Matrix model of outpatient stimulant abuse treatment: History and description. Journal of
Psychiatric Drugs 32(2):157–164, 2000.
Rawson, R.; Huber, A.; Brethen, P.; Obert, J.; Gulati, V.; Shoptaw, S.; and Ling, W. Methamphetamine
and cocaine users: Difference in characteristics and treatment retention. Journal of Psychoactive
Drugs 32(2):233–238, 2000.
Rawson, R.A.; Marinelli-Casey, P.; Anglin, M.D.; Dickow, A.; Frazier, Y.; Gallagher, C.; Galloway, G.P.;
Herrell, J.; Huber, A.; McCann, M.J.; Obert, J.; Pennell, S.; Reiber, C.; Vandersloot, D.; and
Zweben, J. A multi-site comparison of psychosocial approaches for the treatment of metham-
phetamine dependence. Addiction 99(6):708–717, 2004.
Rawson, R.A.; Shoptaw, S.J.; Obert, J.L.; McCann, M.J.; Hasson, A.L.; Marinelli-Casey, P.J.; Brethen,
P.R.; and Ling, W. An intensive outpatient approach for cocaine abuse treatment: The Matrix
model. Journal of Substance Abuse Treatment 12(2):117–127, 1995.
Shoptaw, S.; Rawson, R.A.; McCann, M.J.; and Obert, J.L. The Matrix model of outpatient stimulant
abuse treatment: Evidence of efficacy. Journal of Addictive Diseases 13(4):129–141, 1994.
255

Counselor Treatment Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Counselor Treatment Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Counselor Treatment Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Counselor’s Treatment

Matrix Intensive Outpatient Treatment for

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES

Public Domain Notice

Electronic Access and Copies of Publication

II. The Role of Drug and Breath-Alcohol Testing in Matrix IOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

III. Individual/Conjoint Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

IV. Early Recovery Skills Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Handouts for Early Recovery Skills Group Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

V. Relapse Prevention Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Session 29: Coping With Feelings and Depression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

VI. Social Support Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

n Counselor’s Treatment Manual (this To create effective treatment protocols for

Overview Program Components

Figure I-1. Sample Matrix IOP Schedule

6:00–6:50 p.m. Early Recovery

Tuesday 12-Step/mutual-help group meetings

7:00–8:30 p.m. Family

Thursday 12-Step/mutual-help group meetings

6:00–6:50 p.m. Early Recovery

The Role of the Counselor n Coordinates with other treatment or social

Working With Client group and attending 12-Step or mutual-

Before clients begin serving as co-leaders, the

n Client’s Treatment Companion—The n Notes to the counselor about anything to

n Providing a client who is denying use with

the client should be taken into a private setting

n Help clients make a treatment schedule.

n Enlist family members’ help in supporting clients’ recovery.

n A description of the various components of the Matrix IOP model

w Individual/Conjoint group sessions

w Early Recovery Skills group sessions

w Social Support group sessions

w Urine and breath tests

w 12-Step or mutual-help group attendance

Session 2: Client Progress/Crisis Intervention

n Help clients address any crises they may be experiencing.

n Reinforce recovery principles clients have learned in treatment.

n IC 2B—Relapse Analysis Chart

w Early Recovery Skills sessions 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 (in Section IV)

w Handouts ERS 3B, 5, 6A, 6B, and 7B (in Section IV)

w Handout SCH 1 (in Section IV)

Session 3: Continuing Treatment Planning

n Help clients set continuing treatment goals.

n Help clients draft a continuing treatment plan.

n Handout IC 3B—Continuing Treatment Plan

n What aspects of treatment have been most helpful?

Handouts for Individual/Conjoint Sessions

I, _____________________________________________, am requesting treatment from the staff of

I agree to the following:

d. Treatment consists of individual and group sessions. Individual appointments can be

Client’s Signature: __________________________________________ Date: _____________

Check all the things that you do regularly or have done

Which behaviors have been easy for you to do?

Which behaviors take the most effort for you to do?

Behavior Not Begun Change Needed

Feelings about the above events

___________________________________ _________ _________________________________ ________

12-Step or Mutual-Help Meetings

Counselor and Co-Leader The counselor begins every session by stating

Client’s Signature: ______________________________ Date: _

_______________________________ _ _____________________